Fiat 500l

Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what
2 0 2 0 F IAT ® 500L
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of
your FIAT® brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google
Play® Store and enter the search keyword “FIAT” (U.S. residents only).
U. S. Canada
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST

UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND
WARRANTY BOOKLETS
mopar.com owners.mopar.ca
20_BG_OM_EN_USC
2 0 2 0 F I AT ® 5 0 0 L OW N E R ’ S M AN UAL
First Edition
fiatusa.com (U.S.) or fiatcanada.com/en (Canada)
©2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group
Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark
of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is
changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
to install them on products previously manufactured. find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new FIAT® brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling common questions.
1-888-242-6342 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
FIAT® brand dealer.
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase
replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL: Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive.
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not WARNING
idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear
gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your
go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
20_BG_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................... 6 1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................ 8 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................55 3
4 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................75 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING ............................................................................................ 118 5
6 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .................................................................................................. 142 6
7 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ................................................................................... 169 7
8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................206 8
9 MULTIMEDIA ............................................................................................................................ 214 9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ................................................................................................. 267 10
11 INDEX........................................................................................................................................... 271 11
INTRODUCTION SEATS........................................................................15 INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................... 27

INTRODUCTION ......................................................... 6 Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) ..................... 15 Interior Lights Controls .......................................27
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)...................... 17 Rear Dome Lights — If Equipped........................28
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL .................................... 7
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — WIPERS AND WASHERS........................................ 28
Essential Information ........................................... 7
If Equipped.......................................................... 19 Front Wiper Operation ........................................28
Symbols................................................................. 7
Heated Seats — If Equipped .............................. 19 Rear Wiper/Washer Operation...........................30
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ................................... 7
Rear Armrest — If Equipped............................... 20 CLIMATE CONTROLS ............................................. 31
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ............. 7
HEAD RESTRAINTS .................................................20 Manual Climate Control Overview......................31
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats.......... 20 Automatic Climate Control Overview .................34
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment ...................... 21 Climate Control Functions ..................................37
KEYS .......................................................................... 8 Front Head Restraint Removal.......................... 21 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)...............37
Key With Remote Control..................................... 8 Rear Head Restraint Removal........................... 22 Operating Tips ....................................................38
IGNITION SWITCH ..................................................10 STEERING WHEEL ...................................................22 WINDOWS ............................................................... 40
Key-In-Ignition Reminder.................................... 11 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .................... 22 Power Windows ...................................................40
SENTRY KEY............................................................. 11 MIRRORS .................................................................23 Wind Buffeting ....................................................41
Key Programming .............................................. 11 Inside Day/Night Mirror .................................... 23 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED....................... 41
Replacement Keys ............................................. 11 Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped......... 23 Opening ...............................................................42
General Information ........................................... 11 Conversation Mirror — If Equipped.................... 24 Closing .................................................................42
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM ................................... 12 Power Mirrors .................................................... 24 Anti-Pinch Protect Feature..................................42
To Arm The System............................................. 12 Folding Mirrors ................................................... 24 Sunroof Reinitialization ......................................42
To Disarm The System ....................................... 12 Heated Mirrors — If Equipped............................ 24 Wind Buffeting ....................................................43
Central Lock/Unlock Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped ......... 24 Power Sun Blind..................................................43
(Switch Safe Lock Device) — If Equipped.......... 13 EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...................................................25 HOOD........................................................................ 43
DOORS ..................................................................... 13 Headlights .......................................................... 25 Opening ...............................................................43
Power Door Locks............................................... 13 Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — Closing .................................................................44
Doors Lock With One Or More Doors Open ...... 14 If Equipped ......................................................... 25 LIFTGATE .................................................................. 44
Auto-Relocking (Only For Rear Doors)............... 14 High Beams ........................................................ 26 Opening ...............................................................44
Child-Protection Door Lock System Flash-To-Pass...................................................... 26 Cargo Area Features ..........................................45
(Rear Doors) ....................................................... 15 Parking Lights..................................................... 26
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay .................... 26
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped.......................... 26
Courtesy Lights/Approaching Lights ................. 26
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED ............ 48 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .........73 STARTING AND OPERATING
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® ... 48 Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) STARTING THE ENGINE .......................................118
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming............ 50 Cybersecurity ...................................................... 73
Normal Starting................................................ 118
Using HomeLink® .............................................. 50 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Cold Weather Operation .................................. 118
Security ............................................................... 51 PROGRAMS ..............................................................74 Extended Park Starting.................................... 119
Troubleshooting Tips .......................................... 51
If Engine Fails To Start .................................... 119
General Information ........................................... 51 SAFETY After Starting .................................................... 119
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT........................................... 52 SAFETY FEATURES ..................................................75 Turbo Charger “Cool Down” ............................ 119
Storage................................................................ 52 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .......................... 75 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .........119
Cupholders ......................................................... 53 Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ............ 76 MODE SELECTOR – IF EQUIPPED.......................120
Power Outlets...................................................... 53 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ..............................81 Operating Modes.............................................. 120
Cigar Lighter — If Equipped ............................... 53
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ......... 81 PARKING BRAKE .................................................122
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED................54
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .......................84 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ..............................122
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ............ 84 Key Ignition Park Interlock .............................. 123
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT
Important Safety Precautions............................ 84 Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System .. 123
PANEL Seat Belt Systems ............................................. 85 Six-Speed Automatic Transmission ............... 123
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..........................................55 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ........... 91 AUTOSTICK.............................................................127
Instrument Cluster Descriptions........................ 56 Child Restraints ................................................102 Operation.......................................................... 127
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ......................... 57 Transporting Pets ............................................115 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING..............................128
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons ..... 57 SAFETY TIPS ......................................................... 115 SPEED CONTROL .................................................128
Change Engine Oil Indicator System ................ 58 Transporting Passengers.................................115 To Activate ........................................................ 129
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ........... 59 Exhaust Gas......................................................115 To Set A Desired Speed................................... 129
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES.....................65 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside To Vary The Speed Setting .............................. 129
Red Warning Lights ............................................ 65 The Vehicle ......................................................115 To Accelerate For Passing ............................... 130
Yellow Warning Lights ........................................ 68 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make To Resume Speed............................................ 130
Yellow Indicator Lights ....................................... 71 Outside The Vehicle .........................................117 To Deactivate .................................................. 130
Green Indicator Lights........................................ 72
White Indicator Lights ........................................ 72
Blue Indicator Lights .......................................... 73
REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED ..................130 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — DEALER SERVICE .................................................175
Rear Park Assist Sensors.................................131 IF EQUIPPED ......................................................... 152 Engine Oil ......................................................... 175
Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts .......................131 Jack Location....................................................152 Engine Oil Filter ................................................ 176
Indications On Display — If Equipped..............132 Removal Of Jack And Tools .............................152 Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................................. 177
Failure Indications ............................................133 Spare Tire Removal..........................................153 Air Conditioner Maintenance .......................... 177
Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System ...........133 Preparations For Jacking ................................154 Body Lubrication .............................................. 178
Park Assist System Usage Precautions...........133 Jacking Instructions .........................................155 Windshield Wiper Blades................................. 178
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ................134 Reinstalling The Jack And Tools ......................158 Exhaust System ............................................... 179
ADDING FUEL ........................................................136 Spare Tire Storage ...........................................159 Cooling System................................................. 181
VEHICLE LOADING ...............................................137 TIRE SERVICE KIT ................................................. 159 Brake System .................................................. 184
Certification Label ............................................137 JUMP STARTING ................................................... 161 Automatic Transmission .................................. 184
TRAILER TOWING .................................................138 Preparations For Jump Start ...........................161 RAISING THE VEHICLE..........................................186
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND Jump Starting Procedure .................................162 TIRES .....................................................................186
MOTORHOME, ETC.) .............................................139 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS............................. 163 Tire Safety Information ................................... 186
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle..139 IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE.................. 164 Tires — General Information ........................... 192
DRIVING TIPS.........................................................140 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE .............................. 165 Tire Types.......................................................... 196
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ...........................140 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ................................ 165 Spare Tires — If Equipped ............................... 197
Driving Through Water ....................................140 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE........................... 167 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ........................... 199
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE Tire Chains and Traction Devices .................. 200
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY SYSTEM (EARS) ................................................... 168 Tire Rotation Recommendations .................... 200
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .........................142 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR).......................... 168
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES .....................201
BULB REPLACEMENT ...........................................142
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Treadwear......................................................... 201
Replacement Bulbs .........................................142
Traction Grades................................................ 201
Replacing Exterior Bulbs ..................................144 SCHEDULED SERVICING ..................................... 169 Temperature Grades........................................ 202
FUSES .....................................................................146 Maintenance Plan ............................................170 VEHICLE STORAGE................................................202
General Information .........................................146 Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle .......................172 BODYWORK ...........................................................203
Underhood Fuses .............................................146 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO ........... 173 Protection From Atmospheric Agents ............. 203
Interior Fuses....................................................148 Checking Oil Level ............................................174 Body And Underbody Maintenance ................ 203
Rear Interior Fuses...........................................151 Adding Washer Fluid .......................................174 Preserving The Bodywork ................................ 203
Maintenance-Free Battery ...............................174
Pressure Washing ............................................175
INTERIORS ............................................................204 UCONNECT SETTINGS .......................................... 215 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

Seats And Fabric Parts.....................................204 Uconnect 4/4 NAV Settings.............................215 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
Plastic And Coated Parts..................................205 SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION ............. 226
FOR YOUR VEHICLE .............................................267
Leather Parts ....................................................205 Safety Guidelines .............................................226
Prepare For The Appointment ......................... 267
Glass Surfaces .................................................205 UCONNECT 4/4 NAV WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY.... 227
Prepare A List ................................................... 267
Introduction ......................................................227 Be Reasonable With Requests ....................... 267
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Radio Mode ......................................................228 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .................................267
IDENTIFICATION DATA..........................................206 Media Mode......................................................235
FCA US LLC Customer Center.......................... 268
Vehicle Identification Number .........................206 Phone Mode .....................................................244
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center ................. 268
BRAKE SYSTEM.....................................................206 Navigation Mode — If Equipped ......................255
In Mexico Contact ............................................ 268
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS....206 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS .............. 259
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands ................ 268
Torque Specifications.......................................207 Radio Operation ...............................................259 Customer Assistance For The Hearing
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..........................................207 Player Operation...............................................259 Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)....................... 268
1.4L Turbo.........................................................207 IPOD®/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL ........... 259 Service Contract .............................................. 268
Reformulated Gasoline ...................................208 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ...... 260 WARRANTY INFORMATION .................................269
Materials Added To Fuel ..................................208 Regulatory And Safety Information .................260 MOPAR PARTS ......................................................269
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ............................208 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ...........................269
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ....209 TIPS ....................................................................... 261 In The 50 United States And
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications .........209 Introducing Uconnect.......................................261 Washington, D.C............................................... 269
MMT In Gasoline...............................................209 Get Started .......................................................261 In Canada ......................................................... 269
Fuel System Cautions.......................................210 Basic Voice Commands ...................................262 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ...........................270
Carbon Monoxide Warnings.............................210 Radio .................................................................262
FLUID CAPACITIES ................................................211 Media ................................................................263
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...................................211 Phone................................................................263
Engine ..............................................................211 Navigation (4 NAV) — If Equipped ...................263
Chassis .............................................................213 Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped .........................264
Android Auto™ — If Equipped .........................264
MULTIMEDIA Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped ........................265
General Information.........................................266
CYBERSECURITY ..................................................214
Additional Information .....................................266
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION important warnings in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your
your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US
LLC aims at a constant improvement of the
Dear Customer, vehicle. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves
Congratulations on selfecting your new vehicle. controls, particularly those used for braking, the right to make changes to the model
Be assured that it represents precision work- steering, transmission, and transfer case described for technical and/or commercial
manship, distinctive styling, and high quality. shifting (if equipped). Learn how your vehicle reasons. For further information, contact an
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with handles on different road surfaces. Your driving authorized dealer.
the assistance of service and engineering skills will improve with experience. When it comes to service, remember that an
specialists to acquaint you with the operation This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has
and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supple- this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated factory-trained technicians and genuine
mented by Warranty Information, and customer to specific markets or versions are not expressly MOPAR® parts, and cares about your satisfac-
oriented documents. In the Warranty Informa- indicated in the text. Therefore, you should only tion.
tion, available online, you will find a description consider the information which is related to the
of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its trim level, engine, and version that you have
customers, the Warranty Certificate and the purchased. Any content introduced throughout
details of the terms and conditions for main- the Owner’s Information, that may or may not be
taining its validity. Please take the time to read applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with
all of these publications carefully before driving the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in
your vehicle for the first time. Following the this publication are intended to help you use
instructions, recommendations, tips, and
INTRODUCTION 7
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Symbols VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

Some vehicle components have colored labels
Essential Information whose symbols indicate precautions to be WARNING! 1
Consult the Table of Contents at the front of this observed when using this component. Refer to Any modifications or alterations to this
Owner’s Manual to determine which section “Warning Lights and Messages” in “Getting To vehicle could seriously affect its
contains the information you desire. Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor- roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a
Since the specification of your vehicle depends mation on the symbols used in your vehicle. collision resulting in serious injury or death.
on the items of equipment ordered, certain
descriptions and illustrations may differ from
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
your vehicle's equipment. This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS
The detailed Index at the back of this Owner's against operating procedures that could result
Manual contains a complete listing of all in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also
subjects. contains CAUTIONS against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may
miss important information. Observe all Warn-
ings and Cautions.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS NOTE:
The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle
lights will flash and the horn will chirp to
acknowledge the signal.
Key With Remote Control has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. Locking Doors With A Key
These numbers can be used to order duplicate
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) key fob
keys from an authorized dealer. 1. Insert the key with either side up.
contains an integrated key. To use the mechan-
ical key, simply push the mechanical key To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 2. Turn the key to the right to lock the door.
release button.
Push and release the unlock button on the key 3. Turn the key to the left to unlock the door.
fob once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice
within five seconds, to unlock all doors and the Replacing The Battery In The Key With
liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash to Remote Control
acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated
entry system will also turn on.
To unlock the liftgate only, push and release the
liftgate button on the key fob once. The liftgate
external handle will be enabled and it will be
possible to use it to open the liftgate. After 30
Integrated Key seconds the external handle will be disabled
1 — Unlock Button again. The turn signal lights will flash to
2 — Mechanical Key Release Button acknowledge the unlock signal.
3 — Lock Button Key Fob Components
4 — Liftgate Button To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
1 — Mechanical Key
Push and release the lock button on the key fob 2 — Screw
to lock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal 3 — Battery Case
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 9
To replace the battery, proceed as follows: Request For Additional Remote Controls Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
dÌnnovation, Science and Economic Develop-
1. Push the mechanical release button to The system can recognize up to eight remote
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
open the mechanical key. controls. Should a new remote control be
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
necessary, go to an authorized dealer. Bring an
2. Turn the screw to unlock using a small conditions suivantes:
screwdriver.
ID document and the vehicle ownership docu- 2
ments with you. 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
3. Take out the battery case and replace the lage, et
battery making sure that polarities are General Information
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
correct. The following regulatory statement applies to all brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
4. Replace the battery case inside the key
vehicle: ettre le fonctionnement.
and lock it by turning the screw to lock.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
NOTE: Rules and with Innovation, Science and La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
Used batteries should be properly disposed of as Economic Development Canada license-exempt siguientes dos condiciones:
specified by law; see an authorized dealer for RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
assistance needed. following two conditions: cause interferencia perjudicial y
Programming Additional Key Fobs 1. This device may not cause harmful interfer- 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
ence, and cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
Refer to “Sentry Key” in this chapter for further
information. 2. This device must accept any interference pueda causar su operación no deseada.
If you do not have a programmed key fob, received, including interference that may
NOTE:
contact an authorized dealer for details. cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
10 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
IGNITION SWITCH WARNING! (Continued)

The ignition switch can be turned to three  Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
different positions: tended is dangerous for a number of
 STOP (OFF/LOCK): engine off, key can be reasons. A child or others could be seriously
removed. Some electrical devices (e.g. sound or fatally injured. Children should be warned
system, central door locking system, etc.) can not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
operate. or the gear selector.
NOTE:  Do not leave the key fob in or near the

The transmission must be shifted into PARK Ignition Switch vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
before the key is turned to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) 1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK) dren. A child could operate power windows,
2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) other controls, or move the vehicle.
position. Then, the key can be removed.
3 — AVV (START)  Do not leave children or animals inside
 AVV (START): engine start-up. parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
 MAR (ACC/ON/RUN): driving position. All elec- build-up may cause serious injury or death.
trical devices are enabled. WARNING!
If the key is turned to the STOP (OFF/LOCK)  Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the auto- CAUTION!
position before shifting into PARK, the key will matic transmission into PARK or the manual
transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE, An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always
have to be moved to the driving MAR (ACC/ON/ remove the key from the ignition and lock all
RUN) position and back to STOP (OFF/LOCK). apply the parking brake, then turn the engine
OFF, remove the key fob from the vehicle and doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Then, the key can be removed.
lock your vehicle.
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
Key-In-Ignition Reminder General Information

CAUTION!
If the driver's door is opened when the key is in The following regulatory statement applies to all
 Always remove the Sentry Key from the
the ignition and the ignition switch is in the Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, a signal will sound vehicle:
vehicle unattended.
to remove the key. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC 2
 The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
SENTRY KEY compatible with some aftermarket remote
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
starting systems. Use of these systems may
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the following two conditions:
security protection.
vehicle. The system does not need to be armed 1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless All of the keys provided with your new vehicle ence, and
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. have been programmed to the vehicle elec- 2. This device must accept any interference
The system uses ignition keys which have an tronics. received, including interference that may
embedded electronic chip (transponder) to Key Programming cause undesired operation.
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. There-
Programming key fobs may be performed at an Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
fore, only keys that are programmed to the
authorized dealer. dÌnnovation, Science and Economic Develop-
vehicle can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Replacement Keys ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
conditions suivantes:
A key which has not been programmed is also vehicle electronics can be used to start the
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the vehicle. Once a Sentry Key has been 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle. programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be lage, et
programmed to any other vehicle. When having 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
If the vehicle security light is on after the key is the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced, brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
turned to the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, it bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
indicates that there is a problem with the elec- dealer. ettre le fonctionnement.
tronics.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las To Arm The System If the vehicle security alarm sounds the horn a
siguientes dos condiciones: second time even when all doors, hood and lift-
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch gate are correctly closed, a fault has occurred in
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no and exit the vehicle. the operation of the system. Contact an autho-
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. With all doors and liftgate closed, lock the rized dealer.
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar door using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) NOTE:
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que key fob. The vehicle security alarm with not arm when the
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
3. The horn will sound and the vehicle secu- mechanical key is used on a single door lock
NOTE: rity light on the central lock/unlock button cylinder.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved on the dashboard will switch on for approx-
To Disarm The System
by the party responsible for compliance could imately three seconds. This shows that the
void the user’s authority to operate the equip- vehicle security alarm is about to arm. Push unlock on the key fob, or insert the key
ment. During this period, if a door is opened, or into the ignition switch and turn the ignition
the ignition switch is turned to MAR (ACC/ switch to the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM ON/RUN), or the power door locks are NOTE:
unlocked in any manner, the vehicle secu- The vehicle security alarm will not disarm when
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle rity alarm will automatically disarm. After
doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition the metal insert of the key is used on a single
approximately three seconds, the vehicle door lock cylinder.
switch for unauthorized operation. While the security light will flash. This shows that the
vehicle security alarm is armed, interior vehicle security alarm is fully armed. The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect
switches for door locks and liftgate release are your vehicle; however, you can create condi-
disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the The activation of the vehicle security alarm is tions where the vehicle security alarm will arm
vehicle security alarm will provide the following followed by a self-diagnosis stage. If a fault is unexpectedly. If you remain in the vehicle and
audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, detected during the self-diagnosis stage, the lock the doors with the key fob, once the vehicle
the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, horn will sound a second time. security alarm is armed, when you pull the door
and the vehicle security light on the instrument handle to exit, the alarm will sound. If this
If the horn sounds a second time, check that all
panel will flash. occurs, push the unlock button on the key fob to
doors, the hood, and the liftgate are closed
correctly, and then rearm the system. disarm the vehicle security alarm.
Central Lock/Unlock (Switch Safe Lock The direction indicators flash three times and  LED OFF: Doors unlocked. Pushing the central
Device) — If Equipped the LED above the button flashes to indicate lock/unlock button once will lock all doors. The
that the Safe Lock device has been activated. If LED will switch on once the doors are locked.
This safety device prevents the operation of the
one or more of the doors are not closed
interior door handles and the door locking/
correctly, the Safe Lock device will not activate,
unlocking button.
preventing a person from getting stuck inside 2
It prevents the opening of the doors from inside the passenger compartment by entering the car
the passenger compartment, serving as an through, and then closing, the open door.
obstacle to break-in attempts (e.g. broken
Deactivating The Safe Lock Device
window).
The Safe Lock device deactivates automatically:
We recommend that you activate the Safe Lock
device each time the vehicle is parked.  By pushing the unlock button on the key fob.
 By placing the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/
Central Lock/Unlock Button
RUN) position.
Once the doors have been locked with the key
DOORS fob, it will no longer be possible to unlock them
by pushing the central lock/unlock button.
Power Door Locks
NOTE:
Push the central lock/unlock button located on
With central locking active (LED on), opening one
the instrument panel, in the switch bank below
of the front doors, it is possible to perform a
the radio. The button has an LED that indicates
central unlocking (LED off). With central locking
whether the doors are locked or unlocked.
Safe Lock Device Location active (LED on), in order to open one of the rear
 LED ON: Doors locked. Pushing the central passenger doors, it is necessary to pull the
Activating The Safe Lock Device lock/unlock button once will unlock all doors. internal door handle twice. With one of the rear
The Safe Lock device is enabled on all the doors The LED will switch off once the doors are doors open (LED off), the unlocking is performed
unlocked. only for that door, not for all of the vehicle.
by quickly double-pushing the lock button on
the key fob.
To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door Doors Lock With One Or More Doors Open
handle to the first detent. If the rear doors are WARNING! (Continued)
It is possible to lock the vehicle using the
locked, you must pull the door handle once to  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or Remote Keyless Entry, internal button, or
unlock the door and pull the door handle a with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving external key fob. The vehicle can also be
second time to open the door. children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous
locked if one or more doors are open. At a
for a number of reasons. A child or others
WARNING! lock command request, the LED illuminates.
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
At closing of the last door, the vehicle main-
 Do not leave children or animals inside should be warned not to touch the parking
tains the central locking status if the key is
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
not placed in the ignition; otherwise the
build-up may cause serious injury or death.  Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat- vehicle will be unlocked and the LED will no
 For personal security and safety in the event tended is dangerous for a number of longer be illuminated.
of a collision, lock the vehicle doors as you reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned NOTE:
drive as well as when you park and leave the
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal If the key is not inserted in the ignition switch, but
vehicle.
or the gear selector. is inside the vehicle, the system does not recog-
 Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the auto- nize the presence of the key and after the closing
matic transmission into PARK or the manual  Do not leave the key fob in or near the
of last door, the vehicle remains locked.
transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE, vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
apply the parking brake, turn the vehicle OFF, dren. A child could operate power windows, Auto-Relocking (Only For Rear Doors)
remove the key fobs from vehicle, and lock all other controls, or move the vehicle.
With the vehicle locked and all doors closed
doors. and lock your vehicle. (LED on), if a passenger opens one of the rear
(Continued) CAUTION! doors (LED off), as soon as the door is closed, it
will be locked again (LED on).
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Child-Protection Door Lock System

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)
(Rear Doors)
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a  Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
To provide a safer environment for small chil-
collision. Remember that the rear doors can vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
dren riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are
only be opened from the outside when the seat belts. In a collision, people riding in
equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked). these areas are more likely to be seriously 2
system.
injured or killed.
NOTE:  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
For emergency exit from the rear seats when the and using a seat belt properly.
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged,
unlock the doors using the central unlock button, Manual Adjustment (Front Seats)
roll down the window and open the door using the
exterior handle. WARNING!
SEATS  Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint seat could cause you to lose control. The seat
Example Child-Protection Door Lock Location System of the vehicle. belt might not be adjusted properly and you
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection could be injured. Adjust the seat only while
Door Lock System WARNING! the vehicle is parked.
 It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside  Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
1. Open the rear door.
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
2. Insert the tip of the key into the lock and riding in these areas are more likely to be your chest. In a collision you could slide under
rotate clockwise to the lock position or seriously injured or killed. the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally
counter clockwise to the unlock position. (Continued) injured. Use the recliner only when the
vehicle is parked.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear
door.
Forward/Rearward Adjustment Seat Height Adjustment

The adjusting bar is located at the front of the The seat height adjustment lever is located on
seats, near the floor. the outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and the lever to raise the seat height or push down-
move the seat forward or rearward. Release the ward on the lever to lower the seat height.
bar once the desired position is reached. Then,
using body pressure, move forward and rear-
ward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched. Recline Lever
WARNING!
 Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the
seat could cause you to lose control. The seat
Height Adjustment Lever belt might not be properly adjusted, and you
could be severely injured or killed. Only adjust
Recliner Adjustment a seat while the vehicle is parked.
The recline lever is located on the outboard side  Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
Adjusting Bar of the seat. To recline the seat, lean forward the seat belt is no longer resting against your
slightly, lift the lever, lean back to the desired chest. In a collision, you could slide under the
position and release the lever. To return the seat belt and be severely injured or killed.
seatback to its normal upright position, lean Use the recliner only when the vehicle is
forward and lift the lever. Release the lever parked.
once the seatback is in the upright position.
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and Reclining Rear Seats
move the seat forward or rearward. Release the
The recliner handle is located on the outside of
WARNING! bar once the desired position is reached. Then,
the seat cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift
using body pressure, move forward and rear-
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the upward on the handle, lean back on the seat-
ward on the seat to be sure that the seat
top of the seatback. This could impair back and when you reach the desired position, 2
adjusters have latched.
visibility or become a dangerous projectile in release the handle.
a sudden stop or collision. WARNING!
 Adjusting a seat while driving may be
Rear Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the result in loss of control which could cause a
seats, near the floor. collision and serious injury or death.
 Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
Rear Seat Recliner Handle
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
Adjusting Bars
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat 2. Fold the seatback forward.

NOTE:
 Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be neces-
sary to reposition the front seats.
 Be sure that the front seats are fully upright
and positioned forward. This will allow the rear
seat to fold down easily.
1. Lift the seatback release lever located on Seatback Recline Lever
the upper outboard side of the seat.
Seatback Folded 4. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats
are left folded for an extended period of time.
This is normal and by simply opening the seats to
the open position, over time the seat cushion will
return to its normal shape.
3. Locate the seatback recline lever on the
Seatback Release Lever outboard side of the seat and lift upward
on the lever. Folding Rear Seat
5. Slowly flip the entire seat rearward and
firmly lock the seat into position.
6. Raise the rear seatback and firmly lock the
seatback into position.
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Heated Seats — If Equipped NOTE:

Equipped Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
On some models, the front driver and
within two to five minutes.
passenger seats may be equipped with heaters
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
in both the seat cushions and seatbacks. The
Push the power lumbar switch to adjust the controls for the front heated seats are located WARNING!
2
lumbar support. Release the switch when you on the outer side of the seat.  Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
reach the desired position. skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when using
the seat heater. It may cause burns even at
low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
 Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
Heated Seat Switch heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
Power Lumbar Switch  Push the heated seat switch once to turn the been overheated could cause serious burns
heated seat on. due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
 Push the heated seat switch a second time to
turn the heated seat off.
Rear Armrest — If Equipped To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
WARNING! head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
To use the armrest, fold it downward.
 All occupants, including the driver, should not push the adjustment button located at the base
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat of the head restraint, and push downward on
until the head restraints are placed in their the head restraint.
proper positions in order to minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a crash.
 Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
Folding Rear Seat Armrest
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
HEAD RESTRAINTS The front driver and passenger seats are Head Restraint
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk equipped with Reactive Head Restraints. In the 1 — Release Button
of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact, the Reactive Head 2 — Adjustment Button
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should Restraints will automatically extend forward,
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint minimizing the gap between the back of the
is located above the top of your ear. occupant's head and the Reactive Head The Reactive Head Restraints will automatically
Restraint. return to their normal position following a rear
impact. If the Reactive Head Restraints do not
return to their normal position, see an autho-
rized dealership immediately.
NOTE: Rear Head Restraint Adjustment For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to “Occupant Restraints System” in “Safety” for
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain further information.
head restraints, the outboard head restraints
additional clearance to the back of the head.
have two comfort positions, while the central Front Head Restraint Removal
head restraint has to be used in the raised posi- The head restraints should only be removed by 2
WARNING! tion. When there are no occupants in the center qualified technicians, for service purposes only.
 A loose head restraint thrown forward in a seat, the head restraint can be lowered for If either of the head restraints require removal,
collision or hard stop could cause serious maximum visibility for the driver. When the see an authorized dealer.
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. center seat is being occupied, the head
Always securely stow removed head restraint has to be in the raised position. WARNING!
restraints in a location outside the occupant To raise the outboard head restraints, pull  All occupants, including the driver, should not
compartment. upward on the head restraint. To lower the head operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat
 ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled restraints, push the adjustment button located until the head restraints are placed in their
in the vehicle to properly protect the occu- at the base of the head restraint, and push proper positions in order to minimize the risk
pants. Follow the re-installation instructions downward on the head restraint. of neck injury in the event of a crash.
above prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
 Head restraints should never be adjusted
pying a seat.
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
 Do not place items over the top of the Reac- vehicle with the head restraints improperly
tive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat adjusted or removed could cause serious
covers or portable DVD players. These items injury or death in the event of a collision.
may interfere with the operation of the Reac-
tive Head Restraint in the event of a collision
and could result in serious injury or death.
Adjustment Buttons
Rear Head Restraint Removal STEERING WHEEL To unlock the steering column, pull the control
handle down. To tilt the steering column, move
To remove the outboard or center head
restraints, raise it as far as it can go. Then, push Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column the steering wheel upward or downward as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering
the adjustment button and the release button This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column, pull the steering wheel outward or push
at the base of each post while pulling the head column upward or downward. It also allows you
it inward as desired. To lock the steering column
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
in position, push the control handle up until fully
the head restraint posts into the holes and push tilt/telescoping control handle is located on the
engaged.
downward. Then, adjust it to the appropriate steering column, below the turn signal lever.
height. WARNING!
WARNING! Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
 A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
driving or driving with the steering column
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
Always securely stow removed head control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
restraints in a location outside the occupant warning may result in serious injury or death.
compartment.
 ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
in the vehicle to properly protect the occu-
pants. Follow the re-installation instructions
above prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat.
MIRRORS NOTE:
This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
Inside Day/Night Mirror moving in REVERSE.
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the
vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed 2
position at the windshield. The mirror installs on
the windshield button with a counterclockwise
rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The
mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right for various drivers. The mirror should be Adjusting Rearview Mirror
adjusted to center on the view through the rear Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the Automatic Dimming Mirror
reduced by moving the small control under the feature on or off by pushing the button at the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of base of the mirror. A light to the left of the CAUTION!
the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted button will illuminate to indicate when the To avoid damage to the mirror during
while the small control under the mirror is set in dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
the day position (toward the windshield). right of the button does not illuminate. directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
Conversation Mirror — If Equipped Power Mirrors Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

There is a conversation mirror located at the top The power mirror controls are located on the These mirrors are heated to melt frost
of the overhead console. driver’s door trim panel. To adjust a mirror, turn or ice. This feature will be activated
the control knob toward the left or right mirror whenever you turn on the rear window
positions indicated. Tilt the control wand in the defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate
direction you want the mirror to move. When Controls” in this chapter for further information.
you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn the
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
control to the center position to prevent acci-
dentally moving a mirror. An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the
sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor
downward and swing the mirror cover upward.
The light turns on automatically. Closing the
mirror cover turns off the light.
Conversation Mirror Location
To access the conversation mirror, pull down-
ward on the mirror until it reaches the open
position.
Power Mirror Controls

Folding Mirrors
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the
mirror to pivot forward or rearward to help avoid Illuminated Vanity Mirror
damage. The mirror has three detent positions:
full forward, normal and full rearward.
Conversation Mirror
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If EXTERIOR LIGHTS

Equipped
Headlights
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the visor to The multifunction lever, located on the left side
block out the sun. of the steering wheel, controls the operation of 2
the headlights, headlight high beams, lane
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the
change assist and turn signals.
sun visor downward and unclip it. Pull the sun
visor along the “Slide-On-Rod” until the sun NOTE:
visor is in the desired position. The external lights can only be turned on with the Headlight Operation
ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
NOTE:
When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime
Running Lights (DRLs) will be deactivated.
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If
Equipped
To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs),
rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the
O symbol.
“Slide-On-Rod” Feature
NOTE:
Multifunction Lever
The low beams and side/tail lights will not be on
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever upward with DRLs.
to the first detent for headlight operation.
The DRLs function can be turned on or off
through the touchscreen. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
High Beams Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay Courtesy Lights/Approaching Lights

With the low beams activated, push the multi- When this feature is selected, the driver can This feature allows the driver to locate the
function lever forward (toward the front of the choose to have the headlights remain on for a vehicle when parked in dark areas. It can be
vehicle) to turn on the high beams. The lever will preset period of time after the engine is enabled through the Uconnect system.
remain forward in a fixed position and the tell- turned off. Through the Uconnect menu, under the
tale will illuminate in the instrument cluster Activation “Greeting Lights” setting, the driver can choose
display. Pull the multifunction lever rearward between the following activation times: 0, 30,
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the Remove the key or turn the ignition to the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position, and pull the multifunction 60, or 90 seconds.
high beams.
lever toward the steering wheel within two To switch off the feature, select 0 seconds.
Flash-To-Pass minutes. Each time the lever is pulled, the acti- When the vehicle is unlocked, the low beams
You can signal another vehicle with your head- vation of the lights will be extended by 30 and parking lights will turn on for the time spec-
lights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever seconds. The activation of the lights can be ified. Once the door is opened, the lights will
toward you. This will cause the high beam head- extended to a maximum of 210 seconds. remain on for an additional three minutes, or
lights to turn on, and remain on, until the lever Deactivation until all doors are closed. Once all doors are
is released. closed, the lights will turn off after 10 seconds.
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering
Parking Lights wheel and hold it for more than two seconds. The lights can also be turned off by:
To turn on the parking lights, remove the key or Front Fog Lights — If Equipped  Locking the door
turn the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) posi-
tion and turn on the headlights. The fog light switch is located on the center  Placing the ignition in the AVV (START) or MAR
stack of the instrument panel, just below the (ACC/ON/RUN) position
NOTE: radio. Push the switch once to turn the front fog
If the parking lights are left on and the key is in Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
lights on. Push the switch a second time to turn
the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position with the door for further information.
the front fog lights off.
open, an audible chime will sound and a
message will show in the instrument cluster
display. The chime will stop as soon as the door
is closed or the lights are switched off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS Push the switch to the off/left position from its
center position and the lights are always off.
The switches on the left and right sides of the
overhead console controls the map or reading
Interior Lights Controls function of the lights. Push the switch to the
right to turn on the right light and push the
The interior light switches are located in the
switch to the left to turn on the left light.
overhead console. The interior lights can be set 2
to three different positions (off/left position,
center position, on/right position).
Using the switch on the bottom of the overhead
console, push the switch to the on/right posi-
tion from its center position and the lights are
always on.
Off/Left Position
Leave the switch in the center position, and the
lights are turned on and off when the doors are
opened or closed. Map/Reading Light Switches
CAUTION!
Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that
the switch is in the center position or that
the lights are off to avoid draining the
battery.
On/Right Position
Center Position
Interior Light Timing (Center Position) Rear Dome Lights — If Equipped The rear dome lights come on by opening any of
There are four different modes of operation that the doors. They will turn off when the doors are
This vehicle may be equipped with a single rear
can be activated in this position: closed.
dome light.
 When one door is opened, a three minute timer WIPERS AND WASHERS
is activated.
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on
 When the key is removed from the ignition the right side of the steering column.
(within two minutes of the ignition being turned
off), a 10 second timer is activated. NOTE:
The windshield wipers/washers will only
 When the doors are unlocked with the key fob,
operate with the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/
a 10 second timer is activated.
RUN) position.
 When the doors are locked with the key fob, the
Front Wiper Operation
lights will turn off. Rear Dome Light Location — Closed Roof
There are five different modes of operation for
Interior Light Timing (On/Right Position) For vehicles equipped with a sunroof, there are the front windshield wipers. The windshield
When all doors are closed, a 15 minute timer is two dome lights located below the grab handles wiper lever can be raised or lowered to access
activated. of the rear doors. these modes.
NOTE:
The timer is deactivated when the key is moved
into the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
Rear Dome Light Locations — If Equipped With A Sunroof Windshield Wiper Lever
Front Windshield Washer Operation

Windshield Wiper Off — CAUTION! (Continued)
This is the normal position of the wiper lever. Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward
 In cold weather, always turn off the wiper
the steering wheel to activate the washers. The
switch and allow the wipers to return to the
Intermittent Wiper System wipers will activate automatically for three
park position before turning off the engine. If
cycles after the lever is released.
the wiper switch is left on and the wipers 2
Intermittent Low Speed —
freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first motor may occur when the vehicle is
detent for low intermittent speed to operate the restarted.
wipers with a fixed pause of 10 seconds.
 Always remove any buildup of snow that
Intermittent High Speed — prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the off position. If the windshield
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the
wiper control is turned off and the blades
second detent for high intermittent speed to
cannot return to the off position, damage to
operate the wipers with a delay that is depen-
the wiper motor may occur.
dent on the speed of the vehicle.
Front Windshield Washer Operation
Low Continuous Speed — LO Manual High Speed/Mist
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third CAUTION! Push the lever upward from the off position. The
detent to operate the wipers at a low contin-  Turn the windshield wipers off when driving wipers will operate at high speed to clear off
uous speed. through an automatic car wash. Damage to road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. This
High Continuous Speed — HI the windshield wipers may result if the wiper operation will continue until the lever is
control is left in any position other than off. released. When the lever is released, the wipers
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the fourth will return to the off position and automatically
detent to operate the wipers at a high contin- (Continued)
shut off.
uous speed.
Rear Wiper/Washer Operation  In continuous mode, when the lever is in the Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward acti-
(continuous) position. vates the rear window washer. Keep the wind-
Activation
shield wiper lever pushed for more than half a
Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring second to activate the rear window wiper as
upward to operate the rear window wiper as well. Releasing the windshield wiper lever will
follows: activate the smart washing function.
 In intermittent mode, when the front wind-
shield wiper is not operating and the lever is in
the (intermittent) position.
 In synchronous mode (at half the speed of the
front window wiper), when the front windshield
wiper is operating and the lever is in the Rear Window Wiper Operation
(intermittent) position, or when the REVERSE
gear is engaged, the front windshield wiper is
operating, and the lever is in the O (off) posi-
tion. Rear Window Washer Operation
Deactivation
The function stops when the windshield wiper
lever is released.
CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Climate Control Overview
The Climate Control system allows you to regu-

late the temperature, air flow, and direction of
air circulating throughout the vehicle. The
controls are located on the touchscreen (if 2
equipped) and on the instrument panel below
the radio.
Manual Climate Controls

Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuminate when the A/C system is engaged.
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can
be used when outside air conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be
used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous
use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode
is not recommended.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 20 minutes.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the knob
counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler temperatures. Rotating the knob
clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures.
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you
select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the off position.
NOTE:
Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower speeds.
Icon Description
Panel Mode Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow
of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from 2
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor
outlets.
Floor Mode Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode Mix Mode

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture
on the windshield.
Front Defrost Mode Front Defrost Mode

Turn the knob clockwise to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging.
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Automatic Climate Controls
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on. Performing this function again
will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button to change the system between Recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can
be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in
all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of
the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not
recommended.
Icon Description
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this
function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes.
Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for further information. 2
Front Defrost Button
Push and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is
on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level
will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging. Performing this function will cause the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) to switch into manual mode. If
the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 20 minutes.
Passenger Temperature Knob
Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Rotate the knob clockwise for warmer temperature
settings. Rotate the knob counterclockwise for cooler temperature settings. When the SYNC feature is active, the
passenger’s temperature will move with the driver’s temperature. Acting on the passenger's temperature will cause the
SYNC feature to turn off.
Blower Control Knob
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are eight blower speeds
available. The speeds can be selected using the blower control knob on the faceplate. The blower speed increases as
you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the
blower control knob counterclockwise.
Icon Description
Mode Control: Below are the modes of air distribution that can be selected individually, or in combination with each other to reach a desired
distribution mode.
Windshield Mode Windshield Mode
Air comes from the outlets directed at the windshield meant for defrosting, and side window demisting. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield.
Panel Mode Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow
of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Floor Mode Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Climate Control Power Button

Push and release this button to turn the Climate Control on/off.
Driver Temperature Knob

Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Rotate the knob clockwise for warmer temperature settings.
Rotate the knob counterclockwise for cooler temperature settings. When the SYNC feature is active, the driver’s
temperature will also manage the passenger’s temperature.
Climate Control Functions Recirculation 3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
A/C (Air Conditioning) In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
settings. You experience the greatest effi-
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recircu-
The A/C (Air Conditioning) button allows the ciency by simply allowing the system to
lation feature may be unavailable if conditions
operator to manually activate or deactivate the function automatically.
exist that could create fogging on the inside of 2
A/C system. When the A/C system is turned on, the windshield. NOTE:
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if
into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, push  It is not necessary to move the temperature
equipped, the Recirculation mode is not
the A/C button to turn off the A/C and manually settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
allowed in Defrost mode to improve window automatically adjusts the temperature, mode,
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings.
clearing operation. Recirculation is disabled and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or
automatically if this mode is selected. as possible.
Floor modes.
Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
NOTE: mode causes the LED in the control button to  The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
blink and then turns off. Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric
 For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in customer-programmable feature.
Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain To provide you with maximum comfort in the
active to prevent fogging of the windows. Automatic Operation automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan remains on low until the engine
 If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side 1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate.
warms up. The blower increases in speed and
glass, select Defrost mode, and increase 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would transition into Auto mode.
blower speed if needed. like the system to maintain by adjusting
 If your A/C performance seems lower than the temperature control buttons. Once the
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser desired temperature is displayed, the
(located in front of the radiator), for an accumu- system achieves and automatically main-
lation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle tains that comfort level.
water spray from the front of the radiator and
through the condenser.
Manual Operation Override Vacation/Storage

CAUTION!
This system offers a full complement of manual Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
damage to the heating elements:
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) display run the Air Conditioning (A/C) system at idle for
will be turned off when the system is being used about five minutes, in fresh air with the blower  Use care when washing the inside of the rear
in the manual mode. setting on high. This will ensure adequate window. Do not use abrasive window
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of cleaners on the interior surface of the
NOTE: window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing
compressor damage when the system is started
The system will not automatically sense the pres- solution, wiping parallel to the heating
again. If you are leaving your vehicle dormant
ence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost elements. Labels can be peeled off after
for more than four weeks, disconnect the nega-
mode must be manually selected to clear the soaking with warm water.
tive cable from the battery. Refer to “Jump
windshield and side glass.
Starting Procedures” in “In Case Of Emergency”  Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
Operating Tips for further information. abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
NOTE: Window Fogging
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for  Keep all objects a safe distance from the
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in window.
suggested control settings for various weather
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear
conditions.
the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and Outside Air Intake
Winter Operation increase the front blower speed. Do not use
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
the Recirculation mode without Air Condi-
To ensure the best possible heater and front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
tioning (A/C) for long periods, as fogging may
defroster performance, make sure the engine such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
occur.
cooling system is functioning properly and the intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
proper amount, type, and concentration of plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
mode during Winter months is not recom- of ice, slush, and snow.
mended, because it may cause window fogging.
Cabin Air Filter  Engine on

CONTROL
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
WEATHER
 Fan speed set to 1st speed or greater SETTINGS
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized
 Temperature control knob turned completely Warm Weather
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to Turn on and set
clockwise to red section the mode control to
have it replaced when needed. 2
The heater is switched off when at least one of the position.
System Maintenance the conditions above is no longer verified.
Cool Sunny
In Winter, the Climate Control system must be Operate in
NOTE:
turned on at least once a month for about position.
The power of the electric heater is modulated
10 minutes. according to the battery voltage. Cool & Humid Set the mode control
Have the system inspected at an authorized Conditions
to and turn
dealership before the Summer. Operating Tips Chart
on to keep
NOTE: CONTROL windows clear.
The system uses R-1234yf coolant which does WEATHER
SETTINGS Cold Weather Set the mode control
not pollute the environment in the event of acci-
dental leakage. Under no circumstances is the Hot Weather And Set the mode control to the position. If
use of R-134a allowed. Vehicle Interior Is windshield fogging
to , on, and
Very Hot starts to occur, move
blower on high. Roll
Additional Electric Heater — If Equipped down the windows the control to the
The additional electric heater ensures more for a minute to flush position.
rapid passenger compartment heating. out the hot air. Adjust
the controls as
It activates in cold weather conditions, if the
needed to achieve
following conditions are verified:
comfort.
 Outside temperature low
 Engine coolant temperature low

WINDOWS WARNING!
Power Windows Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, and do not let children play with
Power Window Controls power windows. Do not leave the key fob in
The power window controls are located on the or near the vehicle, or in a location
driver's door trim panel. There is a single switch accessible to children. Occupants,
on the front passenger door, which operate the particularly unattended children, can
front passenger window and a single switch on become entrapped by the windows while
each rear door that operates the rear passenger Power Window Switch Panel operating the power window switches. Such
door window. The window controls will operate entrapment may result in serious injury or
1 — Driver Side Front Window Switch
only when the ignition switch is in the MAR death.
2 — Passenger Side Front Window Switch
(ACC/ON/RUN) position. 3 — Passenger Side Rear Window Switch
4 — Driver Side Rear Window Switch Auto-Down
5 — Window Lockout Switch The window switches have an Auto-Down
feature. Push the window switch for approxi-
NOTE: mately one second, release, and the window will
The power window switches will remain active for go down automatically. To cancel the
up to three minutes after the ignition switch is Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in
placed in the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position. Opening either the up or down direction and release the
either front door will cancel this feature. switch. To open the window part way, pull the
window switch briefly, and release the switch
when the window is in the desired position.
Auto-Up Feature With Auto-Reverse Resetting The Auto-Up Feature POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
Protection — If Equipped
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
The sunroof has two glass panels (the front one
Pull the window switch for approximately one window probably needs to be reset. To reset
is operational and the rear one fixed) and is
second, then release, and the window will go up Auto-Up:
equipped with an electrically operated sun
automatically.
1. Pull the window switch up to close the blind. 2
To stop the window during an Auto-Up opera- window completely and continue to hold The power sunroof and the power sun blind can
tion, push or pull the window switch again. the switch up for an additional two seconds be operated only with the ignition key turned to
To close the window part way, pull the window after the window is closed. the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
switch briefly and release it when you want the 2. Push the window switch down to open the The power sunroof and power sun blind
window to stop. window completely and continue to hold switches are located in the overhead console.
NOTE: the switch down for an additional two
seconds after the window is fully open.
 If the window runs into any obstacle during
Auto-Closure, it will reverse direction and then Wind Buffeting
go back down. Remove the obstacle and use
Wind buffeting can be described as the percep-
the window switch again to close the window.
tion of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type
 Any impact due to rough road conditions may sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind
trigger the Auto-Reverse function unexpectedly buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof
during Auto-Closure. If this happens, pull the (if equipped) in certain open or partially open
switch and hold to close the window manually. positions. This is a normal occurrence and can
be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the Power Sunroof Switches
WARNING! rear windows open, open the front and rear 1 — Power Sun Blind Switch
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If 2 — Power Sunroof Switch
There is no auto-reverse protection when the
the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
objects from the window before closing.
buffeting or open any window.
then stop automatically. This is called “Express Sunroof Reinitialization

WARNING! Open”. To open the sunroof partway, push the
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or power sunroof switch briefly and release it when 1. Place the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never you want the sunroof to stop. RUN) position.
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a 2. Pull and hold the power sunroof close
location accessible to children. Occupants, NOTE:
During Express Open operation, any movement switch until the sunroof is completely
particularly unattended children, can closed and you hear an audible click.
become entrapped by the power sunroof of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
while operating the power sunroof switch. 3. Pull and hold the power sunroof close
Closing
Such entrapment may result in serious injury switch again within five seconds. Do not
or death. With the sunroof in the full open position, pull release the switch.
and hold the power sunroof switch for approxi-
 In a collision, there is greater risk of being mately one second and release. The sunroof will 4. As the power sunroof close switch is held,
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. close completely, then stop automatically. This the sunroof panel will open completely and
You could also be seriously injured or killed. then close again.
is called “Express Close.” To close the sunroof
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
partway, pull the power sunroof switch briefly 5. Once all sunroof motion has stopped,
make sure all passengers are properly
and release it when you want the sunroof to release the power sunroof close switch.
secured too.
stop.
 Do not allow small children to operate the NOTE:
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body NOTE: If the switch is released prior to completion of this
parts, or any object to project through the During Express Close operation, any movement procedure, the procedure must be repeated.
sunroof opening. Injury may result. of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
6. Confirm that express operation is func-
Anti-Pinch Protect Feature tional for open and close operations.
Opening
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
Push the power sunroof switch for approxi- closing of the sunroof during the Express Close
mately one second and the sunroof will stop at operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
the vented position. Push the power sunroof sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automati-
switch a second time for approximately one cally retract. Remove the obstruction if this
second and release, the sunroof will open fully, occurs.
Wind Buffeting With the blind fully open, pull the power sun
blind switch and the blind will move towards the
Wind buffeting can be described as the percep-
front part of the vehicle, until it is fully closed.
tion of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type
sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind NOTE:
buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof During the automatic opening and closing stages, 2
(if equipped) in certain open or partially open if the power sun blind switch is pulled again it will
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can stop the blind movement.
be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the
rear windows open, then open the front and Closing
rear windows together to minimize the With the sun blind fully open, pull and hold the Hood Release Lever
buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the power sun blind switch for approximately one 2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to second and release. The sun blind will close push the red safety catch lever to the left
minimize the buffeting or open any window. completely, then stop automatically. This is and raise the hood. The safety catch lever
Power Sun Blind called “Express Close.” is located under the center front edge of
Opening To close the sun blind partway, pull the sun the hood.
blind switch briefly and release it when you want
Push the sun blind switch for approximately one the sun blind to stop.
second and the sun blind will open completely,
then stop automatically. This is called “Express HOOD
Open.”
Opening
To open the sun blind partway, push the sun
blind switch briefly and release it when you want To open the hood, two latches must be released
the sun blind to stop. to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under
the left side of the instrument panel.
Safety Catch Lever
Closing LIFTGATE WARNING!

WARNING! Opening  Driving with the liftgate open can allow
Be sure the hood is fully latched before To unlock the liftgate, use the key fob or acti- poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured by
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully vate the central locking button located on the
these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in instrument panel below the radio.
you are operating the vehicle.
motion and block your vision. Failure to To open the liftgate, push the liftgate electronic
follow this warning could result in serious  If you are required to drive with the liftgate
release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid
injury or death. open, make sure that all windows are closed,
motion.
and the climate control blower switch is set at
high speed. Do not use the recirculation
CAUTION! mode.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to Gas props support the liftgate in the open posi-
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and drop tion. However, because the gas pressure drops
the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully with temperature, it may be necessary to assist
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle the props when opening the liftgate in cold
unless hood is fully closed, with both latches weather.
engaged.
Liftgate Electronic Release
Liftgate Emergency Release Cargo Area Features Tilt Of Cargo Floor

As a security measure, a liftgate emergency The cargo floor can also be arranged at an angle
Rear Cargo Storage Features
release is built into the liftgate latching mecha- (tilted toward the rear seatbacks), in order to
nism. To access the liftgate emergency release, This vehicle features a load platform which can facilitate access to the area below the luggage
proceed as follows: be adjusted to three different heights, permit- compartment as well as securing items within 2
ting modular luggage compartment volume: this compartment in the event of sudden
1. Remove the rear headrests and fold down braking of the vehicle.
 Position 1 (platform completely lowered)
the seats completely.
permits maximum luggage compartment
2. Take the screwdriver from the tool box capacity.
supplied.  Position 2 (platform at threshold level) permits
3. With the screwdriver, remove the yellow a level load threshold to facilitate loading/
tab. unloading of objects in the luggage compart-
ment. It also allows the space underneath to be
used as a additional compartment for stowing
objects which are more fragile or small.
 Position 3 (platform completely raised) in
conjunction with the lowering of the rear seat Tilt Floor Feature
and front passenger side seatback, permits
long objects to be loaded. It is advisable to use CAUTION!
this position only for the actual period in which The dimension of the cargo floor permit a
the objects are transported, then return the maximum capacity of a distributed weight of
platform to position 1 or 2. 154 lbs (70kg) (if positioned at threshold
Liftgate Emergency Release Yellow Tab Location level) or 88 lbs (40 kg) (if positioned at
4. Press the screwdriver into the seat in order raised level) do not add objects with a higher
to trigger the release trunk tab (follow the weight.
direction arrow to open).
Access To Double Load Compartment NOTE:

To access the double load compartment, Movements of the load platform must take place
proceed as follows: in a central position relative to the luggage
compartment.
1. Grip handle and raise platform, holding it
with one hand. Moving The Load Platform
To move the load platform from lower to upper
position, proceed as follows:
1. Grip handle and raise the platform, holding
Load Compartment it with one hand.
3. Then reposition the platform correctly in
the housings on the side panels and rear
crossmember.
Load Platform
1 — Handle
2 — Platform
2. Place the desired objects in compartment. Load Platform

1 — Handle
2 — Platform
Platform Housings
1 — Front Locations
2 — Rear Locations
2. Position the platform correctly on housing

on the side panels.
CAUTION!
The maximum load admitted per each bag
hook is 22 lbs (10 kg).
Storage Compartments 2
There are two storage compartments located on
the rear side panels.
Cargo Tie Down Locations

Cargo hooks are also available on the side
Raised Position panels to fix loads which are not excessively
heavy (e.g. bags).
1 — Housing Locations
2 — Front Housing Locations
Cargo Area Tie Downs — If Equipped

There are two tie downs inside the luggage Storage Compartment
compartment for attaching cables which can
secure the load carried.
Two additional tie downs are located on the rear
crossmember.
Cargo Side Panel Hook Location
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED Before You Begin Programming Programming A Rolling Code
HomeLink®
For programming garage door openers that
HomeLink® replaces up to three remote
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of were manufactured after 1995:
controls (hand-held transmitters) that operate
the garage before you begin programming.
devices such as garage door openers, motor- These garage door openers can be identified by
ized gates, lighting or home security systems. For more efficient programming and accurate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where
The HomeLink® unit operates off your vehicles transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is the hanging antenna is attached to the garage
battery. recommended that a new battery be placed in door opener. It is NOT the button that is
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is normally used to open and close the door. The
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
being programmed to the HomeLink® system. name and color of the button may vary by manu-
sunvisor designate the three different Home-
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the facturer.
Link® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button. MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position and push and
hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and
III) for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator
flashes.
NOTE:
 Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink® for the first
time. Do not erase channels when program-
ming additional buttons.
Training The Garage Door Opener
 If you have any problems, or require assis- 1 — Door Opener
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor tance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, 2 — Training Button
NOTE: on the Internet at HomeLink.com for informa-
HomeLink® is disabled when the vehicle security tion or assistance.
alarm is active.
1. Place the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or Programming A Non-Rolling Code
position. “TRAINING” button. On some garage door
For programming garage door openers manu-
openers/devices there may be a light that
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to factured before 1995:
blinks when the garage door opener/
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the Home-
device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. 1. Place the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/
Link® button you wish to program while
RUN) position. 2
keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in NOTE:
view. You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
step after the LEARN button has been pushed. 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the Home-
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
Link® button you wish to program while
want to program while you push and hold 6. Return to the vehicle and push the
keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
the hand-held transmitter button. programmed HomeLink® button twice
view.
(holding the button for two seconds each
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
time). If the garage door opener/device 3. Push and hold the Homelink® button you
the indicator light. The HomeLink® indi-
activates, programming is complete. want to program while you push and hold
cator will flash slowly and then rapidly after
the hand-held transmitter button.
HomeLink® has received the frequency NOTE:
signal from the hand-held transmitter. 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
Release both buttons after the indicator  If the garage door opener/device does not acti- the indicator light. The HomeLink® indi-
light changes from slow to rapid. vate, push the button a third time (for two cator will flash slowly and then rapidly after
seconds) to complete the training. HomeLink® has received the frequency
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the
 To program the remaining two HomeLink® signal from the hand-held transmitter.
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING”
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining Release both buttons after the indicator
button. This can usually be found where
button. DO NOT erase the channels. light changes from slow to rapid.
the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener/device motor.
5. Push and hold the programmed It may be helpful to unplug the device during the NOTE:
HomeLink® button and observe the cycling process to prevent possible overheating
 If the indicator light stays on constantly,
indicator light. of the garage door or gate motor.
programming is complete and the
 If the indicator light stays on constantly, 1. Place the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/ garage door/device should activate
programming is complete and the RUN) position. when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
garage door/device should activate
when the HomeLink® button is pushed. 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to  To program the two remaining
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the Home- HomeLink® buttons, repeat each
 To program the two remaining Home- Link® button you wish to program while step for each remaining button. DO
Link® buttons, repeat each step for keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in NOT erase the channels.
each remaining button. DO NOT erase view.
the channels. If you unplugged the garage door opener/device
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® for programming, plug it back in at this time.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming button while you push and release (cycle)
Using HomeLink®
For programming transmitters in Canada/ your hand-held transmitter every two
seconds until HomeLink® has successfully To operate, switch the ignition to the MAR
United States that require the transmitter
accepted the frequency signal. The indi- (ACC/ON/RUN) position and the press and
signals to “time-out” after several seconds of
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly release the programmed HomeLink® button.
transmission:
when fully trained. Activation will now occur for the programmed
Canadian radio frequency laws require trans- device (i.e., garage door opener, gate oper-
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to ator, security system, entry door lock, home/
seconds of transmission, which may not be long change flash rates. When it changes, it is office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held trans-
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds mitter of the device may also be used at any
during programming. Similar to this Canadian or longer in rare cases. The garage door time. If the ignition is placed in the STOP
law, some US gate operators are designed to may open and close while you are program- (OFF/LOCK) position, HomeLink® will remain
time-out in the same manner. ming. active for three minutes. During this time, if
5. Push and hold the programmed the vehicle is locked, HomeLink® is disabled.
HomeLink® button and observe the
indicator light.
Security If you have any problems, or require assistance, General Information

please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell The following regulatory statement applies to all
Internet at HomeLink.com for information or
or turn in your vehicle. Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
assistance.
To do this, push and hold the two outside vehicle:
buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator WARNING! This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC 2
flashes. Rules and with Innovation, Science and
 Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
NOTE: dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the
garage while programming the transceiver. RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
All channels will be erased. Individual channels following two conditions:
cannot be erased. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or
death. 1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is ence, and
 Your motorized door or gate will open and
disabled when the vehicle security alarm is
close while you are programming the 2. This device must accept any interference
active.
universal transceiver. Do not program the received, including interference that may
Troubleshooting Tips transceiver if people, pets or other objects cause undesired operation.
If you are having trouble programming Home- are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
Link®, here are some of the most common solu-
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as dÌnnovation, Science and Economic Develop-
tions:
required by Federal safety standards. This ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
 Replace the battery in the garage door opener de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
includes most garage door opener models
hand-held transmitter. manufactured after 1982. Do not use a conditions suivantes:
 Push the LEARN button on the garage door garage door opener without these safety 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
opener to complete the training for a Rolling features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on lage, et
Code. the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety infor-
mation or assistance. 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
 Did you unplug the device for programming and brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
remember to plug it back in? brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las

siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved Glove Compartment Storage Front Center Armrest
by the party responsible for compliance could 1 — Upper Glove Compartment Lift upward on the armrest to gain access to the
void the user’s authority to operate the equip- 2 — Lower Glove Compartment storage area.
ment.
The front center armrest can also be lifted up
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT To open the upper glove compartment, push
upward on the handle release. The glove
and adjusted in three positions. To adjust the
armrest down, pull up on the armrest, then
Storage compartment door will automatically open. push the latch down.
To open the lower glove compartment, pull the
Glove Compartment
release handle.
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel and Front Center Armrest Storage — If Equipped
features both an upper and lower storage area. The front center armrest contains a storage
compartment. To open the storage compart-
ment, push in the release latch on the front of
the armrest.
Armrest Storage Release Latch

Cupholders
For the driver and front passenger, cupholders
are located on the floor console between the
front seats.
2
Rear Cupholder Passenger Compartment Power Outlet

Power Outlets NOTE:
Passenger Compartment Power Outlet Do not connect devices with power higher than
180 W to the socket. Do not damage the socket
The power outlet is located on the instrument by using unsuitable adaptors.
Front Cupholders panel, below the climate controls. It only oper-
For the rear seat passengers, there is one ates with the ignition key at MAR (ACC/ON/ Cigar Lighter — If Equipped
cupholder located in the center armrest RUN). This is located on the instrument panel,
(if equipped). On models with optional "smoker’s kit," the below the climate controls. To activate the
cigar lighter takes the place of the power cigar lighter, push and release the knob.
socket. Refer to “Cigar Lighter” in this section After a few seconds the knob automatically
for further information. returns to its initial position, and the cigar
lighter is ready for use.
WARNING! ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack
crossbars. The roof rack does not increase the
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes The crossbars and siderails are designed to total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be
very hot. To avoid serious injury, handle the carry the weight on vehicles equipped with a sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle
cigar lighter with care. Always check that the luggage rack. The load must not exceed 110 lbs plus that on the external rack does not exceed
cigar lighter has turned off. (50 kg), and should be uniformly distributed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
over the luggage rack crossbars.
WARNING!
NOTE: There are two attachment points inside the door
jambs that the roof rack crossbars attach to. Cargo must be securely tied down before
 Always check that the cigar lighter is switched driving your vehicle. Improperly secured
off. loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly
 Do not connect devices with power higher than at high speeds, resulting in personal
180 W to the socket. Do not damage the injury or property damage. Follow the roof
socket by using unsuitable adaptors. rack cautions when carrying cargo on
your roof rack.
Roof Rack Attachment Points

55
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Descriptions 4. Temperature Gauge

CAUTION!
1. Speedometer  The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within Driving with a hot engine cooling system
 Indicates vehicle speed. could damage your vehicle. If the
the normal range indicates that the
2. Instrument Cluster Display engine cooling system is operating satis- temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over and
factorily. stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
 The instrument cluster display shows conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
messages when the appropriate condi-  The gauge pointer will likely indicate a back into the normal range. If the pointer
tions exist. Refer to “Instrument Cluster higher temperature when driving in hot remains on the “H,” turn the engine off
Display” in this chapter for further infor- weather or up mountain grades. It immediately and call an authorized dealer
mation. should not be allowed to exceed the for service.
upper limits of the normal operating
3. Tachometer
range. 5. Fuel Gauge
 Indicates the engine speed in revolu-
 The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
tions per minute (RPM x 1000). WARNING! fuel tank when the ignition switch is in
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. the ON/RUN position.
You or others could be badly burned by
 The fuel pump symbol points to the
steam or boiling coolant. You may want to
side of the vehicle where the fuel door is
call an authorized dealer for service if your
located.
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
under the hood yourself, refer to the warning
under “Cooling System Pressure Cap” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for further
information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 57
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons

The system allows the driver to select informa-
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instru-
tion by pushing the following buttons mounted
ment cluster display, which offers useful infor-
on the steering wheel:
mation to the driver. With the ignition in the OFF
position, opening/closing of a door will activate
the display for viewing, and display the total
miles (kilometers) in the odometer. Your instru- 3
ment cluster display is designed to display
important information about your vehicle’s Instrument Cluster Display
systems and features. Using a driver interactive
display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how
systems are working and give you warnings
when they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
controls allow you to scroll through and enter
1 — Arrow Up/Down Scroll Through Menus And
the main menus and submenus. You can
Submenus
access the specific information you want and
2 — Arrow Right/Left Access Information/
make selections and adjustments.
Submenu Screens
3 — OK Button For Selecting And Resetting
Information
 Up Arrow Button  Left Arrow Button Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time the ignition is cycled to the ON
Push and release the up arrow Push and release the left arrow
or RUN position. To reset the Oil Change Indi-
button to scroll upward through button to access the information
cator system (after performing the scheduled
the main menu and submenus. screens or submenu screens of a
maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
 Down Arrow Button main menu item.
 OK Button 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position
Push and release the down arrow (do not start the engine).
button to scroll downward through The OK button may be used for the
the main menu and submenus. following: 2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly,
three times within 10 seconds.
 Right Arrow Button  Select
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK
Push and release the right arrow  Reset (hold) position.
button to access the information
screens or submenu screens of a Change Engine Oil Indicator System
NOTE:
main menu item. Your vehicle is equipped with an Engine Oil If the indicator message illuminates when the
Change Indicator system. The “Oil Change vehicle is started, the Oil Change Indicator
Required” message will flash in the instrument system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
cluster display for approximately 10 seconds procedure.
after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The
Engine Oil Change Indicator system is duty
cycle based, which means the engine oil
change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items  Settings Trip

The menu comprises a series of functions  Display Push and release the up or down arrow button
arranged in a cycle. The menu includes the until the Trip menu item is displayed in the
following functions:  Safety & Assistance
instrument cluster display.
 Speedometer  Security The Trip menu provides the following
 Trip Speedometer submenus:
 Instantaneous Info (If Equipped) 3
 Instantaneous Info (If Equipped) Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Speedometer Menu item is displayed in  Trip A
 Trip A
the instrument cluster display. Push and release
 Trip B
 Trip B the OK button to change the speedometer scale
 Vehicle Info from MPH to km/h. Push and hold the OK button Instantaneous Info (If Equipped)
to return the speedometer from km/h to MPH. The Instantaneous Info submenu contains the
 Tire Pressure
following information.
 Service  Distance To Empty (Range)
 Audio  Instantaneous Fuel Consumption

 Phone — If Equipped
 Navigation — If Equipped
 Messages
Trip A
Trip A submenu is divided into two pages that contain the following information.
Page Menu item Description

Trip A First Page Distance Shows the distance traveled during Trip A.
Travel Time Shows the total travel time for Trip A.
Push the OK button on the Steering Wheel to reset the values on this page.
Trip A Second Page Average Consumption Shows the average fuel usage during Trip A.
Average Speed Shows the average speed during Trip A.
Trip B
Trip B submenu is divided into two pages that contain the following information.
Page Menu item Description

Trip B First Page Distance Shows the distance traveled during Trip B.
Travel Time Shows the total travel time for Trip B.
Trip B Second Page Average Consumption Shows the average fuel usage during Trip B.
Average Speed Shows the average speed during Trip B.
Vehicle Info Service The Phone menu has the following submenus:
The Service submenu will display information  Phone: Displays information on phone connec-
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Vehicle Info menu item is displayed in about scheduled maintenance. A pop-up will tivity. Pushing the OK button on the Steering
the instrument cluster display. appear in the display if service is required. Wheel will enter the phone submenus.
The Vehicle Info menu will display the following The following information will display in the  Recent Calls: Displays information on the last
submenus: pop-up: ten calls made. The information provided
 Distance to next service visit includes the phone number / phone book 3
 Tire Pressure
name and type of call (incoming, outgoing, or
 Service  Days until next service visit lost).
Tire Pressure Audio  Message Reader: Displays text messages
received. Push the OK button on the Steering
The Tire Pressure submenu will indicate an Push and release the up or down arrow button Wheel to select a message to read. The system
under inflated tire. When a tire goes below the until the Audio menu title is displayed in the will also display if a message has been read or
recommended inflation pressure, the Tire Pres- instrument cluster display. not.
sure Monitoring System (TPMS) telltale will illu-
The Audio menu item will display information
minate in the cluster, and the Tire Pressure  Favorite Numbers: Displays up to ten favorite
based on the audio source being listened to.
submenu will appear in the Instrument Cluster numbers. Push the OK button on the Steering
Display, indicating all underinflated tires. A “Tire Phone Wheel to call a favorite number.
Low” message will be present, and the under
inflated tire or tires will be highlighted. Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Phone menu item is displayed in the
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
instrument cluster display. The Phone menu will
(TPMS)” under “Safety” for further information.
provide pop-ups during phone calls.
Navigation — If Equipped Stored Messages Settings

Push and release the up or down arrow button Push and release the up or down arrow button Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Navigation menu item is displayed in until the Messages Menu item is highlighted. until the Settings menu item is displayed in the
the instrument cluster display. The Navigation This feature shows the number of stored instrument cluster display. The Settings menu
menu provides “turn by turn” instructions when warning messages. Pushing the left or right provides a list of settings that affect the display
using the vehicle’s navigation function. arrow button will allow you to scroll through the and functionality of the instrument cluster
The following information is displayed: stored messages. display.
 Distance to the next turn The settings are as follows:
 The name of the street

 An icon representing the next turn
Setting Menu Item Setting Name Description

Display Backlight Increase or decrease the brightness of the display.
Screen Setup Configure display with the following options:
Zone 1:
 Temperature (Default)
 Time 3
 Date
 Compass
 None
Zone 2:
 Time (Default)
 Title
 Date
 Compass
 Temperature
 Audio Info
 None
Phone Repetition Turn on or off the display of phone related pop-ups.
Nav. repetition Turn on or off the display of navigation related pop-ups.
Auto Reset Trip B Reset Trip B.
Setting Menu Item Setting Name Description

Hill Start Assist — If Equipped Assists when starting a vehicle from a stop on
a hill. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Safety” for further information.
Park Assist Volume Increase or decrease Park Assist volume.
Speed Warning Gives notification of when a set speed is
exceeded.
Rear Seat Alert — If Equipped Alerts the driver to check the back seat of the
vehicle before they get out.
Reset Engine Oil Resets “CHANGE ENGINE OIL” notification after
an oil change has been performed.
Pass. Airbag — If Equipped Allows Passenger Airbag deactivation.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in If the light comes on intermittently or remains The dual brake system provides a reserve
the instrument panel together with a dedicated on while driving, have an authorized dealer braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
message and/or acoustic signal when appli- service the vehicle immediately. portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
cable. These indications are indicative and half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
precautionary and must not be considered as Brake Warning Light
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
exhaustive and/or alternative to the informa- This warning light monitors various the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has 3
tion contained in the Owner’s Manual, which brake functions, including brake dropped below a specified level.
you are advised to read carefully in all cases. fluid level and parking brake appli-
Always refer to the information in this chapter in The light will remain on until the cause is
cation. If the brake light turns on it
the event of a failure indication. All active tell- corrected.
may indicate that the parking brake is
tales will display first if applicable. The system applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or NOTE:
check menu may appear different based upon that there is a problem with the anti-lock The light may flash momentarily during sharp
equipment options and current vehicle status. brake system reservoir. cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
Some telltales are optional and may not appear. conditions. The vehicle should have service
If the light remains on when the parking brake
Red Warning Lights has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
Air Bag Warning Light
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system necessary.
This light will turn on for four to eight malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
seconds as a bulb check when the Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock WARNING!
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on
MAR/ON/RUN position. If the light is Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
is dangerous. Part of the brake system may
either not on during startup, stays on, or turns remain on until the condition has been
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
on while driving, have the system inspected at corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
vehicle checked immediately.
light will illuminate with a single chime when a
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Light
This warning light warns of an over-
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
This warning light will illuminate to heated engine condition. If the engine
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
inform of a problem with the Elec- coolant temperature is too high, this
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
tronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If indicator will illuminate and a single
the ABS system is required.
a problem is detected while the chime will sound. If the temperature reaches
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or the upper limit, a continuous chime will sound
checked by turning the ignition switch from the flash depending on the nature of the problem. for four minutes or until the engine is able to
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and cool, whichever comes first.
should illuminate for approximately two completely stopped and the transmission is If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
seconds. The light should then turn off unless placed in the PARK (P) position. The light should and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C)
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmis-
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; sion into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the
the light inspected by an authorized dealer. however, see an authorized dealer for service temperature reading does not return to normal,
The light also will turn on when the parking as soon as possible. turn the engine off immediately and call for
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is service.
ON/RUN position. running, immediate service is required and you Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case
NOTE: may experience reduced performance, an Of Emergency” for further information.
This light shows only that the parking brake is elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
applied. It does not show the degree of brake vehicle may require towing. The light will come
application. on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
MAR/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped Oil Pressure Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the This light will flash at a fast rate for This warning light will illuminate to
ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position, if approximately 15 seconds when the indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a vehicle security alarm is arming, and light turns on while driving, stop the
chime will sound and the light will turn then will flash slowly until the vehicle vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger is disarmed. possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt chime will sound when this light turns on.
Battery Charge Warning Light 3
Reminder Light will flash or remain on continu- Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
ously and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occu- This warning light will illuminate when corrected. This light does not indicate how
pant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further the battery is not charging properly. If much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
information. it stays on while the engine is running, must be checked under the hood.
there may be a malfunction with the
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light Oil Pressure Sensor Failure Warning Light
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer
This warning light will turn on when as soon as possible. This light will illuminate if there is a
there's a fault with the Electric Power This indicates a possible problem with the elec- failure of the oil pressure sensor. If this
Steering (EPS) system. Refer to trical system or a related component. light illuminates, take it to an autho-
“Power Steering” in “Starting And rized dealer and have them inspect it.
Operating” for further information. Transmission Fault Warning Light
WARNING! This light will illuminate (together
with a message in the instrument
Continued operation with reduced assist
cluster display and a buzzer) to indi-
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
cate a transmission fault. Contact an
others. Service should be obtained as soon
authorized dealer if the message remains after
as possible.
restarting the engine.
Door Open Warning Light If the ABS light is on, the brake system should  Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
be serviced as soon as possible to restore the MAR/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
This indicator will illuminate when one
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light if it was turned off previously.
or more door(s) are not fully closed.
does not turn on when the ignition is placed in
 The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
the ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position, have
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
If the vehicle is moving and a door is opened, Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Warning  This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
there will also be a single chime.
Light — If Equipped ESC event.
Liftgate Open Warning Light “The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
This indicator will illuminate when the Indicator Light” in the instrument
Warning Light — If Equipped
liftgate is open/ajar/not fully closed. cluster will come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or MAR/ON/ This warning light indicates the Elec-
RUN position, and when ESC is activated, it tronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Yellow Warning Lights should go out with the engine running. If the Each time the ignition is turned to ON/
ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously with RUN or MAR/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light the engine running, a malfunction has been on, even if it was turned off previously.
This light monitors the Anti-Lock detected in the ESC system. If this light remains
Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle Low Fuel Indicator Light
on when the ignition is placed in the has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an When the fuel level reaches approxi-
ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have mately 3 gal (11 L) this light will turn
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
the problem diagnosed and corrected. on, and remain on until fuel is added.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake  The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” and the “ESC
system is not functioning and service is Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
required. However, the conventional brake time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
system will continue to operate normally if the MAR/ON/RUN position.
brake warning light is not on.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Passenger Air Bag Indicator Light

WARNING!
Warning Light (MIL)
This light should come and remain on
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indi- for four to eight seconds as a bulb
referenced above, can reach higher
cator Light (MIL) is a part of an check when the ignition is first turned
temperatures than in normal operating
Onboard Diagnostic System called to the AVV/START or MAR/ON/RUN
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
OBD II that monitors engine and auto- position. If the light stays on, or comes on while
slowly or park over flammable substances
matic transmission control systems. This driving it may indicate a problem with a
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. 3
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is passenger air bag system, if the light flickers it
This could result in death or serious injury to
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If may indicate an air bag warning light failure.
the driver, occupants or others.
the bulb does not come on when turning the Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the system immediately.
condition checked promptly. CAUTION!
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Warning Light
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage
the light after engine start. The vehicle should to the vehicle control system. It also could The warning light switches on and a
be serviced if the light stays on through several affect fuel economy and driveability. If the message is displayed to indicate that
typical driving styles. In most situations, the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter the tire pressure is lower than the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require damage and power loss will soon occur. recommended value and/or that slow
towing. Immediate service is required. pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
not be guaranteed.
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic Should one or more tires be in the condition
converter damage. The vehicle should be mentioned above, the display will show the indi-
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as cations corresponding to each tire.
possible if this occurs.
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
CAUTION! tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
Do not continue driving with one or more flat efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the telltale after replacing one or more tires or
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s the TPMS to continue to function properly.
immediately using the dedicated tire repair responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon CAUTION!
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
as possible. to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres- The TPMS has been optimized for the
sure telltale. original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), pressures and warning have been
should be checked monthly when cold and Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
established for the tire size equipped on
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
or sensor damage may result when using
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your malfunction indicator is combined with the low
replacement equipment that is not of the
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
pressure label, you should determine the mately one minute and then remain continu-
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. ously illuminated. This sequence will continue
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has to become inoperable. After using an
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- that you take your vehicle to an authorized
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is dealer to have your sensor function checked.
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
variety of reasons, including the installation of
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
Yellow Indicator Lights Fuel Cutoff Indicator Light — If Equipped Rear Defrost Light
External Light Failure Indicator Light — If This telltale will illuminate after an This indicator will illuminate when the
Equipped accident has occurred, and the rear window defroster is on. The rear
system has shut the fuel off. window defroster automatically turns
The External Light Failure Indicator off after 20 minutes.
will come on when a failure to one of Fuel Cutoff Failure Light — If Equipped
the following lights is detected: CAUTION!
This light will illuminate if there is a 3
fuel cutoff failure. If this light illumi- Failure to follow these cautions can cause
 Direction Indicators
nates, take it to an authorized dealer damage to the heating elements:
 Backup Lights and have them inspect it.  Use care when washing the inside of the rear
 Parking Lights window. Do not use abrasive window
Fuel Level Sensor Failure
cleaners on the interior surface of the
 Daytime Running Lights This light illuminates when there is a window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing
fuel level sensor failure. If this light solution, wiping parallel to the heating
 License Plate Lights
illuminates, take it to an authorized elements. Labels can be peeled off after
The failure relating to these lights could be: dealer and have them inspect it. soaking with warm water.
 One or more blown bulbs  Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
Icy Road Condition Indicator Light — If abrasive window cleaners on the interior
 A blown protection fuse Equipped surface of the window.
 A break in the electrical connection This light will illuminate during an icy  Keep all objects a safe distance from the
road condition. window.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Indicator Light
This light indicates that the transmis- When the left or right turn signal is
sion fluid temperature is running hot. This telltale will illuminate when the activated, the turn signal indicator will
This may occur with severe usage, vehicle security alarm system has flash independently and the corre-
such as trailer towing. If this light detected an attempt to break into the sponding exterior turn signal lamps
turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. vehicle. will flash. Turn signals can be activated when
Then, shift the transmission into PARK and run the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or
Green Indicator Lights
the engine at idle or slightly higher until the light up (right).
turns off. Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If NOTE:
Equipped
WARNING!  A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
If you continue operating the vehicle when This indicator light will illuminate driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light when the cruise control is set to the turn signal on.
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to desired speed. Refer to “Speed
Control” in “Starting And Operating”  Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or
for further information. either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
exhaust components and cause a fire.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped White Indicator Lights
CAUTION! This indicator light will illuminate Cruise Control On Light — If Equipped
Continuous driving with the Transmission when the front fog lights are on.
This light will turn on when the cruise
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will control has been turned on, but a
eventually cause severe transmission Park/Headlight On Indicator Light speed is not selected. Refer to
damage or transmission failure. “Speed Control” in “Starting And
This indicator light will illuminate
Operating” for further information.
when the park lights or headlights are
turned on.
Cruise Control Canceled Light — If Equipped systems. When these systems are operating Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent Cybersecurity
This indicator will illuminate when a
performance and fuel economy, as well as
set cruise control value has been Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
engine emissions well within current govern-
canceled by the driver, but cruise Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection
ment regulations.
control is still enabled. Refer to port to allow access to information related to
“Speed Control” in “Starting And Operating” for If any of these systems require service, the OBD the performance of your emissions controls.
further information. II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Authorized service technicians may need to
Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes access this information to assist with the diag-
3
Blue Indicator Lights
and other information to assist your service nosis and service of your vehicle and emissions
High Beam Indicator Light technician in making repairs. Although your system.
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need
This indicator light will illuminate to towing, see an authorized dealer for service as WARNING!
indicate that the high beam head- soon as possible.  ONLY an authorized service technician
lights are on. With the low beams acti-
should connect equipment to the OBD II
vated, push the multifunction lever CAUTION!
connection port in order to read the VIN, diag-
forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn  Prolonged driving with the MIL on could nose, or service your vehicle.
on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever cause further damage to the emission control
rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn  If unauthorized equipment is connected to
system. It could also affect fuel economy and
off the high beams. If the high beams are off, the OBD II connection port, such as a
driveability. The vehicle must be serviced
pull the lever toward you for a temporary high driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
before any emissions tests can be
beam on, "flash to pass" scenario. performed.  Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II  If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
running, severe catalytic converter damage
could occur that may result in an acci-
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
dent involving serious injury or death.
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This service is required.
system monitors the performance of the emis- (Continued)
sions, engine, and transmission control
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The  The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
WARNING! (Continued) OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle then return to being fully illuminated until you
 Access, or allow others to access, infor- was recently serviced, recently had a depleted turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
mation stored in your vehicle systems, battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not
including personal information. system should be determined not ready for the ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. station.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,  The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
in the “Multimedia” section. which you can use prior to going to the test illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system position or start the engine. This means that
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND is ready, you must do the following: your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
can proceed to the I/M station.
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement but do not crank or start the engine. If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emis- see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
NOTE: vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
sions control system. Failure to pass could If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
prevent vehicle registration. failure or replacement, you may need to do
start this test over. nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
For states that require an Inspection normally would in order for your OBD II system
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
and Maintenance (I/M), this check to update. A recheck with the above test routine
the ON position, you will see the “Malfunc-
verifies the “Malfunction Indicator may then indicate that the system is now ready.
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol come on
Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
as part of a normal bulb check. Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
on when the engine is running, and that the
OBD II system is ready for testing. 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
things will happen: during normal vehicle operation you should
have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/
M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine running.
75
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES You also may experience the following when
ABS activates: WARNING! (Continued)
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)  The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for  Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides a short time after the stop) their effectiveness and may lead to a colli-
sion. Pumping makes the stopping distance
increased vehicle stability and brake perfor-  The clicking sound of solenoid valves longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal
mance under most braking conditions. The
Brake pedal pulsations when you need to slow down or stop.
system automatically prevents wheel lock, and 
enhances vehicle control during braking.  A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
 The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of 4
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure the stop
increase braking or steering efficiency
that the ABS is working properly each time the
NOTE: beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle is started and driven. During this
These are all normal characteristics of ABS. vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound
afforded.
as well as some related motor noises.
WARNING!  The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
ABS is activated during braking when the those resulting from excessive speed in
system detects one or more wheels begin to  The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to inter- turns, following another vehicle too closely, or
lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, hydroplaning.
gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, ference caused by improperly installed or
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of high output radio transmitting equipment.  The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
ABS activation(s). This interference can cause possible loss of must never be exploited in a reckless or
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
such equipment should be performed by user’s safety or the safety of others.
qualified professionals.
(Continued)
76 SAFETY
NOTE: Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System

ABS is designed to function with the Original
WARNING!
Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced Elec-
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modifica-  The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
tronic Brake Control (EBC) system that includes
tion may result in degraded ABS performance. prevent the natural laws of physics from
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light System (BAS), Traction Control System (TCS),
traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
Hill Start Assist (HSA), Dynamic Steering Torque
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will tions.
(DST), and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All
turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/ systems work together to enhance vehicle  BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four stability and control in various driving condi- those resulting from excessive speed in
seconds. tions and are commonly referred to as ESC. turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains
Brake Assist System (BAS) The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
on or comes on while driving, it indicates that 
the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to must never be exploited in a reckless or
functioning and that service is required. optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
However, the conventional brake system will emergency braking maneuvers. The system the user's safety or the safety of others.
continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock detects an emergency braking situation by
Brake Warning Light” is on. sensing the rate and amount of brake applica- Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the tion and then applies optimum pressure to the
The Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) function
brake system should be serviced as soon as brakes. This can help reduce braking distances.
uses the integration of the Electronic Stability
possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock The BAS complements the Anti-Lock Brake
Control (ESC) system with the electric power
brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
steering to increase the safety level of the whole
does not come on when the ignition is placed in results in the best BAS assistance. To receive
vehicle.
the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as the benefit of the system, continuous braking
soon as possible. pressure must be applied during the stopping
sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is
no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is
released, the BAS is deactivated.
SAFETY 77
In critical situations (braking with different grip ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
conditions), through the DST function the ESC occurring during severe or evasive driving
This Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system
system controls the steering to implement an maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to
enhances directional control and stability of the
additional torque contribution on the steering other factors, such as road conditions, leaving
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
wheel, to suggest the most correct maneuver to the roadway, or striking objects or other vehi-
corrects for oversteering or understeering of the
the driver. cles.
vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
The coordinated action of brakes and steering WARNING! wheel to assist in counteracting the over-
increases the safety and vehicle control feeling. steering or understeering condition. Engine
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
NOTE: conditions, and driving conditions, influence maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in 4
DST is a driving aid system and does not replace the chance that wheel lift or rollover may the vehicle to determine the vehicle path
the driver's actions while driving the vehicle. occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or intended by the driver and compares it to the
rollovers, especially those that involve actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
leaving the roadway or striking objects or does not match the intended path, ESC applies
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) anticipates the other vehicles. The capabilities of an the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s ERM-equipped vehicle must never be counteracting the oversteer or understeer
steering wheel input and the speed of the exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, condition.
vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of which could jeopardize the user's safety or
 Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more
change of the steering wheel angle and the safety of others.
than appropriate for the steering wheel
vehicle's speed are sufficient to potentially
position.
cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to  Understeer - when the vehicle is turning
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM less than appropriate for the steering
will only intervene during very severe or evasive wheel position.
driving maneuvers.
78 SAFETY
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) And ESC OFF Indicator Light
 The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot  Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indi-
prevent the natural laws of physics from maintain your vehicle, may change the
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the cator Light in the instrument cluster
handling characteristics of your vehicle, and
traction afforded by prevailing road condi- will come on when the ignition switch
may negatively affect the performance of the
tions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents, ESC system. Changes to the steering system, is placed in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
including those resulting from excessive suspension, braking system, tire type and position for four seconds. If the ESC Activation/
speed in turns, driving on very slippery size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continu-
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot performance. Improperly inflated and ously with the engine running, a malfunction
prevent collisions resulting from loss of unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC has been detected in the ESC system. If this
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver performance. Any vehicle modification or light remains on after several ignition cycles,
input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten- poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the and the vehicle has been driven several miles
tive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. effectiveness of the ESC system can increase (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle roll- (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
must never be exploited in a reckless or over, personal injury and death. possible to have the problem diagnosed and
dangerous manner which could jeopardize corrected.
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
(Continued)
SAFETY 79
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light ESC Operating Modes

(located in the instrument cluster) starts to
The ESC system has two available operating
flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the
modes.
ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activa-
tion/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes Full On
when the Traction Control System (TCS) is This is the normal operating mode for ESC.
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indi- Whenever the vehicle is started, the system will
cator Light begins to flash during acceleration, be in this mode. This mode should be used for
ease up on the accelerator and apply as little most driving situations. ESC should only be
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons as ESC Off Switch 4
speed and driving to the prevailing road condi- noted. Refer to “Partial Off” for additional infor-
tions. NOTE:
mation.
To improve the vehicle's traction when driving
NOTE: Partial Off with snow chains, or when starting off in deep
 The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light The “ESC OFF” button is located in the switch snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on bank above the climate control. To enter the switch to the “Partial Off” mode by momentarily
momentarily each time the ignition switch is “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the “ESC pushing the “ESC OFF” button. Once the situation
placed in the ON position. OFF” button and the “ESC Activation/Malfunc- requiring “Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn
tion Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC back on by momentarily pushing the “ESC
 Each time the ignition is placed in the ON posi- OFF” button. This may be done while the vehicle
ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC OFF”
tion, the ESC system will be ON even if it was is in motion.
button and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
turned off previously.
Indicator Light” will turn off. This will restore the
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
is partially off or full off.
80 SAFETY
HSA Activation Criteria Disabling/Enabling HSA

WARNING!
The following criteria must be met in order for If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off, this
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
HSA to activate: can be done through the instrument cluster
functionality of ESC (except for the limited
 The vehicle must be stopped. display menu. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
slip feature described in the TCS section)
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
has been disabled and the “ESC Off  The vehicle must be on a 5% grade or greater Panel” for further information.
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in hill.
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power Traction Control System (TCS)
reduction of TCS is disabled, and the  The gear selection matches vehicle uphill direc-
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the tion (i.e., vehicle in NEUTRAL (N) (manual trans- The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the
ESC system is reduced. mission), vehicle facing uphill is in forward amount of wheel spin of each of the driven
gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE (R) wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pres-
gear). sure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
engine power is reduced to provide enhanced
The Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is designed to WARNING! acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS
assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), func-
There may be situations on minor hills with a
stop on a hill. HSA will maintain the level of tions similar to a limited slip differential and
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
brake pressure the driver applied for a short controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
when the system will not activate and slight
period of time after the driver takes his foot off one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster
rolling may occur. This could cause a
the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the than the other, the system will apply the brake
collision with another vehicle or object.
throttle during this short period of time, the of the spinning wheel. This will allow more
Always remember the driver is responsible
system will release brake pressure and the engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is
for braking the vehicle.
vehicle will roll down the hill. The system will not spinning. This feature remains active even if
release brake pressure in proportion to the TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode or Full
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts Off mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control
to move in the intended direction of travel. (ESC)” in this section for further information.
SAFETY 81
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS temperature effects, or natural pressure loss

through the tire.
to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but
the TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at recommended cold tire pressure value.
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure. or above the recommended cold tire pressure CAUTION!
on the placard. Once the low tire pressure
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by  The TPMS has been optimized for the original
warning (TPMS Warning Light) illuminates, you
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
must increase the tire pressure to the recom-
means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
mended cold tire pressure in order for the TPMS and warnings have been established for the 4
Warning Light to turn off. The system will auto- tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesir-
pressure should always be set based on cold able system operation or sensor damage may
matically update and the TPMS Warning Light
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire result when using replacement equipment
will turn off once the system receives the
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven that is not of the same size, type, and/or
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to
for at least three hours, or driven less than style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
information.
maximum inflation pressure molded into the (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Informa- For example, your vehicle may have a recom- using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recom-
tion” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for infor- mended cold (parked for more than three mended that you take your vehicle to an
mation on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s hours) tire pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the authorized dealership to have your sensor
tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the function checked.
vehicle is driven, this is normal and there should measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a
 After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
be no adjustment for this increased pressure. temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease
sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This
the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (159
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pres- will prevent moisture and dirt from entering
kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low
sure if the tire pressure falls below the low pres- the valve stem, which could damage the Tire
enough to turn on the TPMS Warning Light. Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
sure warning limit for any reason, including low
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure
82 SAFETY
NOTE: Base System Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
 The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire This is the TPMS warning indicator The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
care and maintenance, or to provide warning of located in the instrument cluster. Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster, an
a tire failure or condition. acoustic signal will be activated, and the “Check
left or right front/rear tire” text message will
 The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres- The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel display when one or more of the four active road
sure gauge while adjusting the tire pressure. rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each should stop as soon as possible, check the
 Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,
pressure readings to the Receiver Module. and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recom-
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the NOTE: mended cold placard pressure value. The
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. It is particularly important for you to check the tire system will automatically update and the Tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regu- Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once
 The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire the updated tire pressures have been received.
larly and to maintain the proper pressure.
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi- The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using an The TPMS consists of the following compo- 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive
accurate tire gauge, even if under-inflation has nents: this information.
not reached the level to trigger illumination of  Receiver Module
the TPMS Warning Light.
 Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
 Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual  Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
tire pressure in the tire.
SAFETY 83
Check TPMS Warnings NOTE:  Once you repair or replace the original road tire
The TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the
75 seconds and remain on solid when a system spare wheel and tire assembly. compact spare tire, the TPMS will update auto-
fault is detected, an audible chime will be acti- matically and the TPMS Warning Light will turn
 The compact spare tire does not have a tire off, as long as no tire pressure is below the
vated and the “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
System” text message will display. If the ignition TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
is cycled, this sequence will repeat providing the compact spare tire. driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
system fault still exists. The TPMS Warning Light
 If you install the compact spare tire in place (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
will turn off when the fault condition no longer
of a road tire that has a pressure below the information.
exists. A system fault can occur with any of the 4
following scenarios: low-pressure warning limit, upon the next
ignition cycle, a chime will sound and the
General Information
 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
TPMS Warning Light will still turn on due to The following regulatory statement applies to all
next to facilities emitting the same radio
the low tire. Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
frequencies as the TPM sensors.
vehicle:
 However, after driving the vehicle for up to
 Installing some form of aftermarket window This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 Rules and with Innovation, Science and
 Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel seconds and then remain on solid. Economic Development Canada license-exempt
housings. RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
 This occurs for each subsequent ignition cycle,
following two conditions:
 Using tire chains on the vehicle. a chime will sound and the TPMS Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then 1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
 Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM remain on solid. ence, and
sensors.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
84 SAFETY
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts Some of the most important safety features in air bag:
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux your vehicle are the restraint systems:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
Occupant Restraint Systems Features always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-  Seat Belt Systems vehicle with a rear seat.
lage, et
 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air 2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout Bags vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to “Child
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le Restraints” in this section for further infor-
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-  Child Restraints mation) must be secured in the appro-
ettre le fonctionnement. Some of the safety features described in this priate child restraint or belt-positioning
section may be standard equipment on some booster seat in a rear seating position.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
models, or may be optional equipment on 3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
siguientes dos condiciones:
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no dealer. front passenger seat, move the seat as far
cause interferencia perjudicial y Important Safety Precautions back as possible and use the proper child
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this
Please pay close attention to the information in
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que section for further information).
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
pueda causar su operación no deseada. system properly, to keep you and your passen- 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
gers as safe as possible. belt behind them or under their arm.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly 5. You should read the instructions provided
approved by the party responsible for compli- with your child restraint to make sure that
ance could void the user’s authority to you are using it properly.
operate the equipment.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
SAFETY 85
7. The driver and front passenger seats Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
should be moved back as far as practical to WARNING! (Continued) (BeltAlert)
allow the front air bags room to inflate.  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
your vehicle has side air bags, and deploy-
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
ment occurs, the side air bags will inflate transport a rear-facing child restraint in that equipped with outboard front passenger seat
forcefully into the space between occu- vehicle. BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt
pants and the door and occupants could
Alert feature is active whenever the ignition
be injured.
Seat Belt Systems switch is in the AVV/START or MAR/RUN posi- 4
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs Buckle up even though you are an excellent tion.
to be modified to accommodate a driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road Initial Indication
disabled person, refer to the “Customer may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
Assistance” section for customer service If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
that includes you. This can happen far away switch is first in the AVV/START or MAR/RUN
contact information. from home or on your own street. position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
WARNING! and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries equipped with outboard front passenger seat
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat is first in the AVV/START or MAR/RUN position
front air bag can cause death or serious belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
injury to a child 12 years or younger, risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the remain on until both outboard front seat belts
including a child in a rear-facing child vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
restraint. belted at all times. BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
(Continued) passenger seat is unoccupied.
86 SAFETY
BeltAlert Warning Sequence The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is to move freely with you under normal condi-
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated not active when the outboard front passenger tions. However, in a collision the seat belt will
when the vehicle is moving above a specified seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard when an animal or other items are placed on of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recom- WARNING!
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is mended that pets be restrained in the rear seat  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
not active when the outboard front passenger (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers more severe injuries in a collision. The air
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt properly stowed. properly. In some collisions, the air bags
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recom- even though you have air bags.
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light mend deactivating BeltAlert.  In a collision, you and your passengers can
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. suffer much greater injuries if you are not
NOTE:
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
based on vehicle speed until the driver and rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is be sure you and others in your vehicle are
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn buckled up properly.
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
on and remain on until the driver and outboard
Change of Status front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.  It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
Lap/Shoulder Belts riding in these areas are more likely to be
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
seriously injured or killed.
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the All seating positions in your vehicle are
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning equipped with lap/shoulder belts.  Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
sequence will begin until the seat belts are vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only seat belts.
buckled again.
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
(Continued)
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
SAFETY 87
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat  A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk  A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
including the driver, should always wear their won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
seat belts whether or not an air bag is also but across your abdomen. Always wear the increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
provided at their seating position to minimize lap part of your seat belt as low as possible worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
the risk of severe injury or death in the event and keep it snug. ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
of a crash.  A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop- Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
 Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. 4
your injuries in a collision much worse. You Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, collision.
might suffer internal injuries, or you could without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat  A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized protect you from injury during a collision. You
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and dealer immediately and have it fixed. are more likely to hit your head in a collision
to keep your passengers safe, too.  A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap
 Two people should never be belted into a buckle will not protect you properly. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used
single seat belt. People belted together can portion could ride too high on your body, together.
crash into one another in a collision, hurting possibly causing internal injuries. Always  A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest collision and leave you with no protection.
belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no you. Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
matter what their size.  A seat belt that is too loose will not protect checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
move too far forward, increasing the possi- ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
(Continued)
88 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit you hear a “click.”
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in
the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a
rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull
out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up
the webbing as far as necessary to allow Positioning The Lap Belt
the seat belt to go around your lap.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt 6. To release the seat belt, push the red
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To button on the buckle. The seat belt will
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the automatically retract to its stowed posi-
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under down the webbing to allow the seat belt
Pulling Out The Latch Plate the seat belt in a collision. to retract fully.
SAFETY 89
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Seat Belt Pretensioner
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
lap/shoulder belt. with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible
a collision. These devices may improve the
to the anchor point.
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) from the seat belt early in a collision. Preten-
above the latch plate, grasp and twist the sioners work for all size occupants, including
seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a those in child restraints.
fold that begins immediately above the 4
NOTE:
latch plate. Pregnant Women And Seat Belts These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the Seat belts must be worn by all occupants belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
folded webbing. The folded webbing must including pregnant women: the risk of injury in must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
enter the slot at the top of the latch plate. the event of an accident is reduced for the The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu-
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it mother and the unborn child if they are wearing pant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt a seat belt. bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A
is no longer twisted. Position the lap belt snug and low below the deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
abdomen and across the strong bones of the must be replaced immediately.
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the Energy Management Feature
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm. The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
90 SAFETY
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped

with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
WARNING!
(ALR)
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
tions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic front air bag can cause death or serious
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure injury to a child 12 years or younger,
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
a child restraint system. For additional informa- including a child in a rear-facing child
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
tion, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using restraint.
retract completely in this case and then care-
The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
fully pull out only the amount of webbing neces-  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
Restraints” section of this manual. The figure
sary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
below illustrates the locking feature for each
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
seating position.
until you hear a "click." the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is transport a rear-facing child restraint in that
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still vehicle.
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
child restraint is installed in a seating position
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
belt.
12 years old and under should always be prop-
erly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down-
a rear seat. ward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
Locations
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
SAFETY 91
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)  Supplemental Side Air Bags
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt Some of the safety features described in this  Supplemental Knee Air Bags
and allow it to retract completely to disengage section may be standard equipment on some
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the models, or may be optional equipment on  Front and Side Impact Sensors
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized  Seat Belt Pretensioners
dealer.
WARNING!  Seat Track Position Sensors
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
 The seat belt assembly must be replaced if in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller Air Bag Warning Light
the switchable Automatic Locking (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and inter-
Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat connecting wiring associated with the electrical The Occupant Restraint Controller 4
belt function is not working properly when Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may (ORC) monitors the readiness of the
checked according to the procedures in the be equipped with the following Air Bag System electronic parts of the air bag system
Service Manual. Components: whenever the ignition switch is in the
 Failure to replace the seat belt assembly AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If
could increase the risk of injury in collisions. Air Bag System Components the ignition switch is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK
position the air bag system is not on and the air
 Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to  Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) bags will not inflate.
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat
belt or children who are using booster seats.  Air Bag Warning Light The ORC contains a backup power supply
The locked mode is only used to install system that may deploy the air bag system even
 Steering Wheel and Column
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints if the battery loses power or it becomes discon-
that have a harness for restraining the child.  Instrument Panel nected prior to deployment.
 Knee Impact Bolsters

 Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
 Seat Belt Buckle Switch
92 SAFETY
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in NOTE: instrument panel, above the glove compart-
the instrument panel for approximately four to If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine ment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition related gauges are not working, the Occupant embossed on the air bag covers.
switch is in the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled.
After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light In this condition the air bags may not be ready to
will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Warning Light, either momentarily or continu-
ously. A single chime will sound to alert you if WARNING!
the light comes on again after initial startup.
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illu- instrument panel could mean you won’t have
minate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning the air bag system to protect you in a
Light if a malfunction is detected that could collision. If the light does not come on as a
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
bulb check when the ignition is first turned
record the nature of the malfunction. While the 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
air bag system is designed to be maintenance comes on as you drive, have an authorized 2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
free, if any of the following occurs, have an dealer service the air bag system 3 — Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag/Driver Knee
authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. Impact Bolster
immediately.
 The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on Front Air Bags
during the four to eight seconds when the igni- WARNING!
tion switch is first in the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder  Being too close to the steering wheel or
position. belts for both the driver and front passenger. instrument panel during front air bag deploy-
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat ment could cause serious injury, including
 The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
four to eight-second interval. death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back,
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. comfortably extending your arms to reach the
 The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit- The passenger front air bag is mounted in the steering wheel or instrument panel.
tently or remains on while driving. (Continued)
SAFETY 93
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately

WARNING! (Continued) during an impact that requires air bag deploy- WARNING! (Continued)
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint ment. A low energy output is used in less severe  Do not put anything on or around the air bag
in front of an air bag. A deploying collisions. A higher energy output is used for covers or attempt to open them manually.
passenger front air bag can cause death more severe collisions. You may damage the air bags and you could
or serious injury to a child 12 years or This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/ be injured because the air bags may no
younger, including a child in a rear-facing longer be functional. The protective covers
or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
child restraint. for the air bag cushions are designed to open
detects whether the driver or front passenger
Never install a rear-facing child restraint only when the air bags are inflating.
 seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to 4
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. Front Air Bags. more severe injuries in a collision. The air
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
not transport a rear-facing child restraint properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
front passenger seat track position sensors that
in that vehicle. deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
WARNING! Front Air Bag Operation
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multi-
stage driver and front passenger air bags. This  No objects should be placed over or near the Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
system provides output appropriate to the air bag on the instrument panel or steering tional protection by supplementing the seat
severity and type of collision as determined by wheel because any such objects could cause belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover colli-
may receive information from the front impact enough to cause the air bag to inflate. sions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
sensors (if equipped) or other system compo- (Continued) frontal collisions, including some that may
nents. produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck under-
rides, and angle offset collisions.
94 SAFETY
On the other hand, depending on the type and Knee Impact Bolsters Supplemental Side Air Bags
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
knees of the driver and front passenger, and (SABs)
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
position the front occupants for improved inter- This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle action with the front air bags. Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators WARNING! Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
of whether or not an air bag should have (SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
 Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
deployed. front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
impact bolsters in any way.
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in  Do not mount any accessories to the knee trim on the outboard side of the seats.
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,
you in position, away from an inflating air bag. citizen band radios, etc. The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occu-
pant injury during certain side impacts, in addi-
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
tion to the injury reduction potential provided by
front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag the seat belts and body structure.
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
the front air bags. This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the panel below the steering column. The Supple-
upper passenger side of the instrument panel mental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enhanced
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags protection during a frontal impact by working
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your front air bags.
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
SAFETY 95
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains and seated properly, or if items are positioned
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. (SABICs) are located above the side windows. in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS are at an even greater risk of injury from a
seam into the space between the occupant and AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.” deploying air bag.
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
and with such a high force that it could injure or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if through side windows in certain side impact
items are positioned in the area where the SAB events.
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag. WARNING! 4
WARNING!  Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the
Do not use accessory seat covers or place deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
objects between you and the Side Air Bags; above the side windows where the SABIC and
the performance could be adversely affected Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
its deployment path are located should
and/or objects could be pushed into you, Label Location
remain free from any obstructions.
causing serious injury. SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
 In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
do not install any accessory items in your
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add
(SABICs) the injury reduction potential provided by the an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do
seat belts and body structure. not add roof racks that require permanent
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the vehicle for any reason.
the window. The SABICs inflate with enough
force to injure occupants if they are not belted
96 SAFETY
Side Impacts Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less WARNING!
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint time than it takes to blink your eyes.  Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
Controller (ORC) determines whether the lean against the door or window. Sit upright in
WARNING! the center of the seat.
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the  Occupants, including children, who are up  Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
severity and type of collision. The side impact against or very close to Side Air Bags can be deployment could cause you to be severely
sensors aid the ORC in determining the appro- seriously injured or killed. Occupants, injured or killed.
priate response to impact events. The system is including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area  Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that where the side air bags inflate, even if they
are in an infant or child restraint. Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain
require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy inde-  Seat belts (and child restraints where appro- won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
pendently; a left side impact deploys the left priate) are necessary for your protection in all even though you have Side Air Bags.
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact collisions. They also help keep you in posi-
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle tion, away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To NOTE:
damage by itself is not a good indicator of get the best protection from the Side Air Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
whether or not Side Air Bags should have Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
deployed. properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly Rollover Events
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side colli-
restrained in a child restraint or booster seat Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
sions, including some collisions at certain
that is appropriate for the size of the child. designed to activate in certain rollover events.
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or mines whether deployment in a particular rollover
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags event is appropriate, based on the severity and
deploy. type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a
good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and
seat belt pretensioners should have deployed.
SAFETY 97
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners  Instrument Panel If you do have a collision which deploys the air
will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover bags, any or all of the following may occur:
 Knee Impact Bolsters
sensing system determines if a rollover event  The air bag material may sometimes cause
may be in progress and whether deployment is  Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experi- pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
ences a rollover or near rollover event, and  Seat Belt Buckle Switch
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing  Supplemental Side Air Bags those you might get sliding along a carpet or
system will deploy the side air bags and seat gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.  Supplemental Knee Air Bags contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial  Front and Side Impact Sensors nent and normally heal quickly. However, if you 4
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants haven’t healed significantly within a few days,
 Seat Belt Pretensioners or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
through side windows in certain rollover or side
immediately.
impact events.  Seat Track Position Sensors
 As the air bags deflate, you may see some
Air Bag System Components If A Deployment Occurs smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal
NOTE: The front air bags are designed to deflate imme- by-product of the process that generates the
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni- diately after deployment. non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
NOTE: nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
Components listed below:
collisions. This does not mean something is throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irrita-
 Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) wrong with the air bag system. tion continues, see your doctor. If these parti-
cles settle on your clothing, follow the garment
 Air Bag Warning Light manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
 Steering Wheel and Column
98 SAFETY
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags Enhanced Accident Response System  Cut off battery power to the:
have deployed. If you are involved in another
In the event of an impact, if the communication  Engine
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
network remains intact, and the power remains
protect you.  Electric Motor (if equipped)
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
WARNING! the ORC will determine whether to have the  Electric power steering
Enhanced Accident Response System perform
Deployed air bags and seat belt  Brake booster
the following functions:
pretensioners cannot protect you in another  Electric park brake
 Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
collision. Have the air bags, seat belt
pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor  Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If  Automatic transmission gear selector
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer Equipped)  Horn
immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.  Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has  Front wiper
power
 Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:  Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes NOTE:
 Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte- from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition
rior trim, but they will open during air bag Response System to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the
deployment. key from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
 Unlock the power door locks. battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks
 After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
in the engine compartment and on the ground
to an authorized dealer immediately. Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
near the engine compartment and fuel tank
any of these other functions in response to the
before resetting the system and starting the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to
 Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights)
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation
after an accident, reset the system by following
Door
the procedure described below. If you have any
doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
SAFETY 99
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure

After the event occurs, when the system is active, a message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or
MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may both be blinking and will continue to
blink. In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must follow the system reset procedure.
Customer Will See

Customer Action NOTE: 4
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State).
2. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
3. Turn right turn signal switch ON. Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
4. Place turn signal in neutral state. Right turn light is OFF.
5. Turn left turn signal switch ON. Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
6. Place turn signal in neutral state. Right turn light BLINKS.
7. Turn right turn signal switch ON. Right turn light is ON SOLID.
100 SAFETY
Customer Will See

Customer Action NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
8. Place turn signal in neutral state. Right turn light is OFF.
9. Turn left turn signal switch ON. Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). Right turn light is OFF.
11. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK.
12. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be completed within one System is now reset and the engine may be
minute or sequence will need to be repeated). started.
Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually).
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in
order to be successful.
SAFETY 101
Maintaining Your Air Bag System related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
WARNING! (Continued) for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
WARNING!  Do not attempt to modify any part of your air or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
bag system. The air bag may inflate acciden- record such data as:
 Modifications to any part of the air bag
tally or may not function properly if modifica-  How various systems in your vehicle were oper-
system could cause it to fail when you need it.
tions are made. Take your vehicle to an ating;
You could be injured if the air bag system is
authorized dealer for any air bag system
not there to protect you. Do not modify the  Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
service. If your seat, including your trim cover
components or wiring, including adding any belts were buckled/fastened;
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
kind of badges or stickers to the steering
(including removal or loosening/tightening of
wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger  How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the 4
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
side of the instrument panel. Do not modify
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer
the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
approved seat accessories may be used. If it  How fast the vehicle was traveling.
add aftermarket side steps or running
is necessary to modify the air bag system for
boards. These data can help provide a better under-
persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the standing of the circumstances in which crashes
 rized dealer.
air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell and injuries occur.
anyone who works on your vehicle that it has Event Data Recorder (EDR) NOTE:
an air bag system. EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
(Continued) This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
other parties, such as law enforcement, could
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
combine the EDR data with the type of personally
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
102 SAFETY
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip- Before buying any restraint system, make sure
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or
WARNING! that it has a label certifying that it meets all
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle In a collision, an unrestrained child can applicable Safety Standards. You should also
manufacturer, other parties, such as law become a projectile inside the vehicle. The make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
enforcement, that have the special equipment, force required to hold even an infant on where you will use it.
can read the information if they have access to your lap could become so great that you
NOTE:
the vehicle or the EDR. could not hold the child, no matter how
strong you are. The child and others could  For additional information, refer to http://
Child Restraints
be badly injured or killed. Any child riding www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up in your vehicle should be in a proper 1–888–327–4236
at all times, including babies and children. Every restraint for the child’s size.
state in the United States, and every Canadian  Canadian residents should refer to Transport
province, requires that small children ride in Canada’s website for additional information:
There are different sizes and types of restraints http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
for children from newborn size to the child safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Children 12 years or younger should ride prop- Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
erly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. make sure you have the correct seat for your
According to crash statistics, children are safer child. Carefully read and follow all the instruc-
when properly restrained in the rear seats tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
rather than in the front. Manual and on all the labels attached to the
child restraint.
SAFETY 103
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
who have not reached the height or weight Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
limits of their child restraint vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
have outgrown the height or weight limit of Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
their rear-facing child restraint vehicle
4
Larger Children Children who have outgrown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
forward-facing child restraint, but are too small seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger, who have Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
outgrown the height or weight limit of their vehicle
booster seat
Infant And Child Restraints The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the infant carrier but are still less than at least two
vehicle. It is recommended for children from years old. Children should remain rear-facing
Safety experts recommend that children ride
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of until they reach the highest weight or height
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be allowed by their convertible child seat.
old or until they reach either the height or
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint.
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
Two types of child restraints can be used
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
seats.
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
104 SAFETY
All children whose weight or height is above the

WARNING! forward-facing limit for the child seat should use WARNING! (Continued)
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in a belt-positioning booster seat until the  When your child restraint is not in use, secure
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
front air bag can cause death or serious cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do
injury to a child 12 years or younger, seat cushion while the child’s back is against not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
including a child in a rear-facing child the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
restraint. booster seat. The child and belt-positioning or seatbacks and cause serious personal
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat injury.
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a belt.
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If Children Too Large For Booster Seats
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not
WARNING!
Children who are large enough to wear the
transport a rear-facing child restraint in that  Improper installation can lead to failure of an shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
vehicle. infant or child restraint. It could come loose in long enough to bend over the front of the seat
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
when their back is against the seatback, should
Older Children And Child Restraints killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
Children who are two years old or who have 5-step test to decide whether the child can use
infant or child restraint.
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
 After a child restraint is installed in the
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. 1. Can the child sit all the way back against
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child the back of the vehicle seat?
or rearward because it can loosen the child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are
restraint attachments. Remove the child 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
for children who are over two years old or who
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat the front of the vehicle seat – while the
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
position. When the vehicle seat has been child is still sitting all the way back?
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
(Continued)
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up shoulder between the neck and arm?
to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
SAFETY 105
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
possible, touching the child’s thighs and then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
WARNING!
not the stomach? this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make under an arm or behind their back. In a
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a
whole trip?
squirming or slouching can move the belt out of child properly, which may result in serious
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or injury or death. A child must always wear
neck, move the child closer to the center of the both the lap and shoulder portions of the
vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat seat belt correctly.
belt on the child correctly. 4
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below

Combined Weight of
Restraint Type the Child + Child LATCH – Lower
LATCH – Lower Seat Belt + Top
Restraint Seat Belt Only Anchors + Top
Anchors Only Tether Anchor
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Restraint
Rear-Facing Child More than 65 lbs X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Restraint
Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
106 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint LATCH Positions For Installing Child
(LATCH) Restraint System anchorage system called LATCH, which stands Restraints In This Vehicle
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There
are two lower anchorages located at the back of
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback
and one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
LATCH Label without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these LATCH Positions
seating positions, the seat belt must be used Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
with the top tether anchorage to install the child Seating Position)
restraint. Please see the following table for Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
more information.
SAFETY 107
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH combined weight of the child and the child
anchorage system to attach the child restraint? restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
be used together to attach a rear-facing or LATCH anchorage system to attach a 4
forward-facing child restraint? rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center No Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a
position using the inner LATCH lower child seat in the center seating position.
anchorages from the outboard seating
positions?
Can two child restraints be attached using a No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
common lower LATCH anchorage? more child restraints. If the center position
does not have dedicated LATCH lower
anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
108 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front
back of the front passenger seat? passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? The rear head restraints can be removed in
Yes every seating position if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint.
Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars that There are tether strap anchorages behind
are found at the rear of the seat cushion where each rear seating position located on the back
it meets the seatback. They are just visible of the seat, near the floor.
when you lean into the rear seat to install the
child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the gap between the seat-
back and seat cushion.
LATCH Lower Anchorages
Upper Tether Anchorages

SAFETY 109
Center Seat LATCH To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child

Restraint
WARNING!
If the selected seating position has a Switch-
 Do not install a child restraint in the center able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat
position using the LATCH system. This posi- belt, stow the seat belt, following the instruc-
tion is not approved for installing child seats tions below. See the section “Installing Child
using the LATCH attachments. You must use Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check
the seat belt and tether anchor to install a what type of seat belt each seating position has.
child seat in the center seating position.
Tether Anchorage Routing Position 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps 4
 Never use the same lower anchorage to and on the tether strap of the child seat so
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will attach more than one child restraint. Please that you can more easily attach the hooks
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
on each side. Each will have a hook or Restraint” for typical installation instructions.
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and 2. Place the child seat between the lower
a way to tighten the connection to the Always follow the directions of the child anchorages for that seating position. For
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and restraint manufacturer when installing your some second row seats, you may need to
some rear-facing child restraints will also be child restraint. Not all child restraint systems recline the seat and / or raise the head
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will be installed as described here. restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top the rear seat can be moved forward and
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
after it is attached to the anchorage. move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
110 SAFETY
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR

the child restraint to the lower anchorages (ALR) Seat Belt:
WARNING!
in the selected seating position.  Improper installation of a child restraint to
When using the LATCH attaching system to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
connect it to the top tether anchorage. See that are not being used by other occupants or
or killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
the section “Installing Child Restraints being used to secure child restraints. An unused turer’s directions exactly when installing an
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- belt could injure a child if they play with it and infant or child restraint.
tions to attach a tether anchor. accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH  Child restraint anchorages are designed to
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the withstand only those loads imposed by
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
child restraint rearward and downward into correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
the seat. Remove slack in the straps circumstances are they to be used for adult
buckled seat belt interferes with the child
according to the child restraint manufac- seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
restraint installation, instead of buckling it
turer’s instructions. items or equipment to the vehicle.
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
6. Test that the child restraint is installed through the child restraint belt path and then
tightly by pulling back and forth on the buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
child seat at the belt path. It should not children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any toys and that they should not play with them.
direction.
SAFETY 111
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle The seat belts in the passenger seating posi- Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” descrip-
Seat Belt tions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic tion in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep tors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems”
Child restraint systems are designed to be
the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the for additional information on ALR.
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
child restraint so that it is not necessary to use Please see the table below and the following
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be sections for more information.
WARNING! “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of
the webbing out of the retractor and then letting Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
 Improper installation or failure to properly the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it Child Restraints In This Vehicle
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise
the restraint. The child could be badly injured 4
while the webbing is pulled back into the
or killed. retractor.
 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations

ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
112 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child using the seat belt to install a
restraint) for using the Tether forward facing child restraint, up to
Anchor with the seat belt to attach the recommended weight limit of
a forward facing child restraint? the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint Yes Contact between the front
touch the back of the front passenger seat and the child
passenger seat? restraint is allowed, if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
Can the rear head restraints be Yes The rear head restraints can be
removed? removed in every seating position
if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint.
Refer to “Head Restraints” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
tighten the seat belt against the seating position with an ALR
belt path of the child restraint? retractor.
SAFETY 113
Installing A Child Restraint With A 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor the retractor to pass it through the belt tighten the lap portion around the child
(ALR): path of the child restraint. Do not twist the restraint while you push the child restraint
belt webbing in the belt path. rearward and downward into the vehicle
Child restraint systems are designed to be seat.
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. you hear a “click.” 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
WARNING! 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
tight against the child seat.
 Improper installation or failure to properly anchorage and tighten the tether strap.
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the See the section “Installing Child Restraints 4
the restraint. The child could be badly injured shoulder part of the belt until you have Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
or killed. pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the tions to attach a tether anchor.
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to
 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s 9. Test that the child restraint is installed
directions exactly when installing an infant or retract back into the retractor. As the
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
child restraint. webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking
seat at the belt path. It should not move
sound. This means the seat belt is now in
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direc-
the Automatic Locking mode.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the tion.
seating position. For some second row 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
seats, you may need to recline the seat
out any webbing. If the retractor is not check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
and/or raise the head restraint (if adjust-
locked, repeat step 5. necessary.
able) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can
be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
114 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top 1. Look behind the seating position where
Tether Anchorage: you plan to install the child restraint to find
the tether anchorage. You may need to
WARNING! move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
no top tether anchorage for that seating
car seat to any location in front of the car
position, move the child restraint to
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
another position in the vehicle if one is
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
available.
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. direct path for the strap between the 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according
See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is to the child restraint manufacturer’s
for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for equipped with adjustable rear head instructions.
the location of approved tether anchorages restraints, raise the head restraint, and
in your vehicle. where possible, route the tether strap
under the head restraint and between the WARNING!
two posts. If not possible, lower the head  An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
restraint and pass the tether strap around lead to increased head motion and possible
the outboard side of the head restraint. injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child secure a child restraint top tether strap.
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.  If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
into the opening between the seatbacks as
you remove slack in the strap.
SAFETY 115
Transporting Pets The best protection against carbon monoxide

WARNING! (Continued) entry into the vehicle body is a properly main-
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat tained engine exhaust system.
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a and using a seat belt properly. Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
passenger during panic braking or in a collision. the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
Exhaust Gas be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that WARNING! have a competent mechanic inspect the
are secured by seat belts.
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain complete exhaust system and adjacent body
SAFETY TIPS carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or 4
and odorless. Breathing it can make you mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
Transporting Passengers unconscious and can eventually poison you. connections could permit exhaust fumes to
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety seep into the passenger compartment. In addi-
CARGO AREA. tips: tion, inspect the exhaust system each time the
vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
 Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in Replace as required.
WARNING!
confined areas any longer than needed to
 Do not leave children or animals inside move your vehicle in or out of the area. Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat Vehicle
 If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift-
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
gate/rear doors open, make sure that all Seat Belts
 It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo windows are closed and the climate control
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli- BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
sion, people riding in these areas are more use the recirculation mode. checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
 If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your the engine running, adjust your heating or
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and cooling controls to force outside air into the
seat belts. vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
(Continued)
116 SAFETY
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced Defroster

after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must WARNING! (Continued)
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
be replaced after a collision if they have been
and place the blower control on high speed. You  ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
should be able to feel the air directed against using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for your floor mat upside down or turn your floor
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
service if your defroster is inoperable. mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is
Air Bag Warning Light secured using the floor mat fasteners on a
Floor Mat Safety Information regular basis.
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four Always use floor mats designed to fit your  ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the igni- vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not inter-
tion switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any
fere with the operation of the accelerator, brake
is either not on during starting, stays on, or other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an
or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that is additional floor mat on top of an existing floor
turns on while driving, have the system securely attached using the floor mat fasteners
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as mat.
so it cannot slip out of position and interfere
possible. After the bulb check, this light will illu- with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or  ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
minate with a single chime when a fault with the impair safe operation of your vehicle in other vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot
Air Bag System has been detected. It will stay on ways. be properly attached and secured to your
until the fault is removed. If the light comes on vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced,
intermittently or remains on while driving, have WARNING! only use a FCA approved floor mat for the
an authorized dealer service the vehicle imme- specific make, model, and year of your
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
diately. vehicle.
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in (Continued)
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
“Safety” for further information. interfere with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle
control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH:
(Continued)
SAFETY 117
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) Outside The Vehicle
 ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the  NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
Tires
driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer- (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
ence, with the vehicle properly parked with change the position of the floor mat and may Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
the engine off, fully depress the accelerator, cause interference with the accelerator, uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
the brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to brake, or clutch pedals. glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
check for interference. If your floor mat inter-  If the vehicle carpet has been removed and sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
feres with the operation of any pedal, or is not re-installed, always properly attach carpet to Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the
the floor and check the floor mat fasteners 4
the vehicle and place the floor mat in your are secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation
trunk. depress each pedal to check for interference pressure.
 ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals Lights
the passenger’s side floor area. then re-install the floor mats.
Have someone observe the operation of brake
 ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or  It is recommended to only use mild soap lights and exterior lights while you work the
slide into the driver’s side floor area when the and water to clean your floor mats. After controls. Check turn signal and high beam indi-
vehicle is moving. Objects can become cleaning, always check your floor mat has cator lights on the instrument panel.
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch been properly installed and is secured to
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners Door Latches
control. by lightly pulling mat. Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
(Continued)
Fluid Leaks
Check the area under the vehicle after over-
night parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other
fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are
detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and
corrected immediately.
118
STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE WARNING! (Continued)
NOTE:
You must press the brake pedal before shifting
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,  Do not leave children or animals inside out of PARK.
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
fasten your seat belts. build-up may cause serious injury or death. Cold Weather Operation
To prevent possible engine damage while
WARNING! Normal Starting starting at low temperatures, this vehicle will
 When exiting the vehicle, always remove the inhibit engine cranking when the ambient
NOTE: temperature is less than –22°F (–30°C) and
key fob from the ignition and lock your
vehicle. Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an
is obtained without pumping or pressing the engine block heater has not been used. An
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or accelerator pedal. externally powered electric engine block heater
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Turn the ignition switch to the AVV (START) posi- is available as a factory installed option.
 Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tion and release it when the engine starts. If the At the time the engine is shut off, the message
tended is dangerous for a number of
engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the “Engine Heater Recommended” will be
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
ignition switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) posi- displayed in the instrument cluster when the
or fatally injured. Children should be warned
tion, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the ambient temperature is below 5°F (–15°C).
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
“Normal Starting” procedure. This acts as a reminder to avoid possible crank
or the gear selector.
delays at the next cold start.
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the Automatic Transmission
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
The gear selector must be in the PARK (P) or
dren. A child could operate power windows,
NEUTRAL (N) position before you can start the
other controls, or move the vehicle.
engine. Depress the brake pedal before shifting
(Continued)
to any driving gear.
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
4. If the engine fails to start after eight After Starting

CAUTION! attempts, allow the starter to cool for at
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and
Use of the recommended SAE 5W-40 least 10 minutes, then repeat the
it will decrease as the engine warms up.
Synthetic oil and adhering to the prescribed procedure.
oil change intervals is important to prevent Turbo Charger “Cool Down”
engine damage and ensure satisfactory CAUTION! This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump
starting in cold conditions. to cool the turbocharger after the engine is shut
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
off. Depending on the type of driving and the
Extended Park Starting continuously for more than 10 seconds at a
amount of cargo, the pump will run for up to
time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying
NOTE: 10 minutes after the engine has been shut off
again.
Extended Park condition occurs when the to circulate coolant through the turbocharger.
vehicle has not been started or driven for at If Engine Fails To Start Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet 5
least 30 days. operation, it is normal to hear it running during
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables
WARNING! this time.
to the battery to ensure a full battery
charge during the crank cycle.
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result A long break-in period is not required for the
2. Cycle the ignition to the START mode and
in flash fire causing serious personal injury. engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
release it when the engine starts.
your vehicle.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 to 15 Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
seconds, cycle the ignition to the OFF CAUTION!
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
mode, wait five seconds to allow the starter To prevent damage to the starter, do not speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
to cool, then repeat the Extended Park continuously crank the engine for more than desirable.
Starting procedure. 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds
before trying again.
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration

within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
MODE SELECTOR – IF EQUIPPED Normal Mode
This mode is aimed at comfort and safety in
to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle accelera- This system allows for three selectable modes, normal traction and driving conditions.
tion in low gear can be detrimental and should according to driving style and road conditions.
be avoided. Traction+ Mode
 Normal Mode
The engine oil installed in the engine at the This mode is intend to be used on low traction
 Traction+ Mode road surfaces (e.g. snow, ice, mud, etc.).
factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with  Gravity Control Function Activation:
anticipated climate conditions under which
The mode selector always remains in the center Rotate the selector and hold in this position for
vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
position. The selected driving mode is indicated approximately half of a second, the corre-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
by the corresponding LED light on the selector, sponding LED will light up and the “Traction+”
“Dealer Service” in “Servicing And Mainte-
and an indication in the display. mode indicator appears on the display with a
nance” for further information.
Operating Modes dedicated message.
CAUTION! Deactivation:
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight To return to "Normal" mode, rotate the mode
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage selector counterclockwise and hold in this posi-
may result. tion for half a second. The LED corresponding to
“Normal” mode will light up and the “Traction+”
NOTE: mode deactivation indication will appear in the
A new engine may consume some oil during its display.
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of NOTE:
the break-in and not interpreted as a problem. If “Traction+” or “Normal” mode was active
Mode Selector when the engine was stopped, the next time it
is started the mode that was selected will be
reactivated.
Gravity Control Function Deactivation:  If the braking system overheats the system will
To deactivate the Gravity Control functionality deactivate through a gradual release of the
This function allows for a constant vehicle
braking pressure, leaving vehicle control to the
speed to be maintained while traveling down- rotate the selector counterclockwise and hold in
driver. Deactivation of the Gravity Control
hill. Noise and vibrations coming from the this position for half a second. The LED corre-
system is accompanied by flashing of the
brakes when the system is activated are sponding to Gravity Control functionality will
warning light, by a dedicated message in the
normal. The system can only be activated at shut off and the Gravity Control functionality
display and an acoustic warning. To reactivate
speeds less than 15 mph (25 km/h). After deactivation indication will appear on the
the system intervention set-up, wait for the
reaching the desired speed, release the accel- display.
system to cool down and turn the selector
erator and brake pedals completely. If you want
NOTE: again.
to increase/decrease the speed, press the
accelerator/brake pedals again.  To prevent engine stalling do not use the  If the speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) and is
system if the transmission is in NEUTRAL. below 31 mph (50 km/h), the Gravity Control 5
NOTE: system intervention set-up is deactivated but is
System intervention set-up can only be engaged  The system is available when the speed is ready for being reactivated when the speed
with "Traction+" mode activated. between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 15 mph drops back below 15 mph (25 km/h). The indi-
(25 km/h). cator in the instrument panel turns off and the
Activation:
 The Gravity Control system must be used with LED on the mode selector stays on. If vehicle
With "Traction+" mode on, rotate the selector speed exceeds 31 mph (50 km/h), the Gravity
clockwise and hold in this position for half a a gear that is suitable for the set speed, in
order to prevent possible engine stalling. While Control system completely deactivates. To
second, until the corresponding LED lights up reactivate it, turn the selector when the speed
the Gravity Control system is operating it is also
and Gravity Control functionality appears on the is again below 15 mph (25 km/h).
possible to take control of the vehicle again by
display with a dedicated message.
pressing the brake or accelerator pedals. If the  On level ground in urban areas it is advised to
Gravity Control is not available when system deactivate the Gravity Control system interven-
intervention set-up is engaged, this could be tion, since for speeds below 15 mph (25 km/h)
due to brake overheating. If this happens, wait in certain conditions, such as when, shifting
for a few minutes. gears or driving over bumps without using the
accelerator pedal, the system might activate.
PARKING BRAKE When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the

front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
CAUTION!
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the grade and away from the curb on an uphill If the Brake Warning Light remains on with
parking brake is fully applied. grade. The parking brake should always be the parking brake released, a brake system
The parking brake lever is located in the center applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle. malfunction is indicated. Have the brake
console. To apply the parking brake, pull the system serviced by an authorized dealer
WARNING! immediately.
lever up as firmly as possible. To release the
parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, push  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
the front button with your thumb, then lower the with access to an unlocked vehicle. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
lever completely.  Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of CAUTION!
reasons. A child or others could be seriously  Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
or fatally injured. Children should be warned after the vehicle has come to a complete
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal stop.
or the gear selector.
 Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above
or in a location accessible to children. A child idle speed.
could operate power windows, other controls,
 Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
or move the vehicle.
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Parking Brake Lever  Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied with the igni- brake failure and a collision. You must press and hold the brake pedal while
tion switch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, shifting out of PARK.
the Brake Warning Light in the instrument  Always fully apply the parking brake when
cluster will illuminate. leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause
damage or injury.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmis-
 It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or sion Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
out of PARK, the ignition must be in the MAR
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose others could be seriously or fatally injured.
(ACC/ON/RUN) mode (engine running or not),
control of the vehicle and hit someone or Children should be warned not to touch the
and the brake pedal (and the lock button on the
something. Only shift into gear when the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
gear selector) must be pressed.
engine is idling normally and your foot is sion gear selector.
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
 Do not leave the ignition key in or near the
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
 Unintended movement of a vehicle could vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil- The transmission gear range (PRND) is
5
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all dren). A child could operate power windows, displayed both beside the gear selector and in
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while other controls, or move the vehicle. the instrument cluster. To select a gear range,
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle press the lock button on the gear selector and
always come to a complete stop, then apply Key Ignition Park Interlock move the selector rearward or forward. You
the parking brake, shift the transmission into must also press the brake pedal to shift the
PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park
transmission out of PARK. Select the DRIVE
ignition key. Once the key is removed, the Interlock system which requires the transmis-
range for normal driving.
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the sion to be in PARK before the ignition can be
vehicle against unwanted movement. turned to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position. The
key can only be removed from the ignition when
 When leaving the vehicle, always remove the the ignition is in the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position,
ignition key from the vehicle and lock the
and once removed, the transmission is locked
vehicle.
in PARK.
(Continued)
The electronically-controlled transmission The transmission gear selector provides PARK, Gear Ranges
adapts its shift schedule based on driver REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-)
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when
inputs, along with environmental and road shift positions. Manual shifts can be made
shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
conditions. The transmission electronics using the AutoStick shift control. Moving the
gear range.
are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few gear selector into the AutoStick (+/-) position
shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat (beside the DRIVE position) activates AutoStick NOTE:
abrupt. This is a normal condition, and mode, providing manual shift control and After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
precision shifts will develop within a few displaying the current gear in the instrument allow the selected gear to engage before acceler-
hundred miles (kilometers). cluster (as 1, 2, 3, etc). Toggling the gear ating. This is especially important when the
selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the engine is cold.
Autostick position will manually select the trans-
mission gear. Refer to "AutoStick" in this PARK (P)
chapter for further information. This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
NOTE:
started in this range. Never attempt to use
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
forward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) posi-
range.
tion (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick
mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is When parking on a level surface, you may shift
Transmission Gear Selector
displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the the transmission into PARK first, and then apply
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] posi- the parking brake.
when the accelerator pedal is released and the tion) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on NEUTRAL.
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake

before shifting the transmission to PARK, other- WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)
wise the load on the transmission locking mech-  It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
anism may make it difficult to move the gear NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
selector out of PARK. As an added precaution, idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
turn the front wheels toward the curb on a the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
downhill grade and away from the curb on an quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose others could be seriously or fatally injured.
uphill grade. control of the vehicle and hit someone or Children should be warned not to touch the
something. Only shift into gear when the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
When exiting the vehicle, always:
engine is idling normally and your foot is sion gear selector.
 Apply the parking brake. firmly pressing the brake pedal.  Do not leave the ignition key in or near the
 Shift the transmission into PARK.  Unintended movement of a vehicle could vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
5
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all dren). A child could operate power windows,
 Turn the engine off.
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while other controls, or move the vehicle.
 Remove the ignition key. the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle
always come to a complete stop, then apply
WARNING! the parking brake, shift the transmission into CAUTION!
PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the  Before moving the transmission gear selector
 Never use the PARK position as a substitute ignition key. Once the key is removed, the out of PARK, you must turn the ignition to the
for the parking brake. Always apply the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the ON/RUN mode, and also press the brake
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to vehicle against unwanted movement. pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear
guard against vehicle movement and
 When exiting the vehicle, always remove the selector could result.
possible injury or damage.
ignition key from the vehicle and lock the  DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
 Your vehicle could move and injure you and vehicle. PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
(Continued) as this can damage the drivetrain.
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
mission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
(Continued)
NOTE: NEUTRAL (N) DRIVE (D)

If the transmission in not correctly shifted into Use this range when the vehicle is standing for This range should be used for most city and
PARK (P) a message on the instrument cluster prolonged periods with the engine running. The highway driving. It provides the smoothest
will be displayed, repeat the procedure as neces- engine may be started in this range. Apply the upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
sary. parking brake and shift the transmission into economy. The transmission automatically
The following indicators should be used to PARK if you must exit the vehicle. upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE
ensure that you have properly engaged the position provides optimum driving characteris-
WARNING! tics under all normal operating conditions.
transmission into the PARK position:
 When shifting into PARK, push the lock button Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off When frequent transmission shifting occurs
on the gear selector and firmly move the gear the ignition to coast down a hill. These are (such as when operating the vehicle under
selector all the way forward until it stops and is unsafe practices that limit your response to heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, or trav-
fully seated. changing traffic or road conditions. You eling into strong head winds), use the AutoStick
might lose control of the vehicle and have a shift control refer to AutoStick in this chapter for
 Look at the transmission gear position display collision. further information to select a lower gear. Under
and verify that it indicates the PARK position
these conditions, using a lower gear will
(P).
improve performance and extend transmission
 With brake pedal released, verify that the gear CAUTION! life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
selector will not move out of PARK. Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for buildup.
any other reason with the transmission in If the transmission temperature exceeds
REVERSE (R)
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission normal operating limits, the transmission
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in controller will expand the range of torque
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A converter clutch engagement. This is done to
come to a complete stop. Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” prevent transmission damage due to over-
for further information. heating.
During cold temperatures, transmission opera-

tion may be modified depending on engine
In the event of a momentary problem, the trans-
mission can be reset to regain all forward gears
AUTOSTICK
coolant temperature. Normal operation will by performing the following steps: AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
resume once the engine temperature has risen feature providing manual shift control, giving
1. Stop the vehicle.
to a suitable level. you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick
Instrument Cluster Messages 2. Shift the transmission into PARK. allows you to maximize engine braking, elimi-
nate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
Dedicated messages will be displayed in the 3. Turn the ignition off. improve overall vehicle performance. This
instrument cluster to alert the driver when system can also provide you with more control
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
certain unusual conditions occur. during passing, city driving, cold slippery condi-
5. Restart the engine. tions, mountain driving, and many other situa-
Transmission Limp Home Mode
tions.
Transmission function are monitored electroni- 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the 5
cally for abnormal conditions. If a condition is problem is no longer detected, the trans- Operation
detected that could result in transmission mission will return to normal operation. When the gear selector is in the AutoStick posi-
damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is acti- tion (beside the Drive position), it can be moved
NOTE:
vated. In this mode, the transmission remains forward and rearward. This allows the driver to
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
in a fixed gear regardless of which forward gear manually select the transmission gear being
mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your
is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will used. Moving the gear selector forward (-) trig-
earliest possible convenience. An authorized
continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator gers a downshift, and rearward (+) an upshift.
dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home The current gear is displayed in the instrument
condition of your transmission. If the transmis-
Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an cluster.
sion cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is
authorized dealer for service without damaging
required.
the transmission.
NOTE:  Avoid using Speed Control when AutoStick is NOTE:

In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only shift engaged because the transmission will not When turning the ignition key quickly, full power
up or down when the driver moves the gear shift automatically. steering functionality can be achieved after a few
selector rearward (+) or forward (-), except as seconds.
 Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
described below.
 The transmission will automatically upshift
when AutoStick is enabled.
SPEED CONTROL
 The system may revert to automatic shift mode
when necessary to prevent engine over-speed. When engaged, the Speed Control takes over
if a fault or overheat condition is detected.
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
 The transmission will automatically downshift
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear 25 mph (40 km/h).
as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging)
selector to the DRIVE position. You can shift in The Speed Control buttons are located on the
and will display the current gear.
or out of the AutoStick position at any time right side of the steering wheel.
 The transmission will automatically downshift without taking your foot off the accelerator
to first gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, pedal.
the driver should manually upshift (+) the
transmission as the vehicle is accelerated. WARNING!
 You can start out (from a stop) in first, second, Do not downshift for additional engine
or third gear. Starting out in second or third braking on a slippery surface. The drive
gear can be helpful in snow or icy conditions. To wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle
select second or third gear after the vehicle is could skid, causing a collision or personal
brought to a stop, tap the gear selector rear- injury.
ward (+) once or twice.
 If a requested downshift would cause the ELECTRIC POWER STEERING Speed Control Buttons
engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur. 1 — SET (+)/Accel
This only operates with the key turned to MAR/ 2 — RES/Resume
 The system will ignore attempts to upshift at ON and the engine started. The steering allows 3 — On/Off
too low of a vehicle speed. the force required at the steering wheel to be 4 — SET (-)/Decel
adjusted to suit driving conditions. 5 — CANC/Cancel
NOTE: To Set A Desired Speed U.S. Speed (mph)

In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle 
Control system has been designed to shut down 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent
has reached the desired speed, push the SET
if multiple Speed Control functions are operated tap of the button results in an increase of
(+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
at the same time. If this occurs, the Speed 1 mph.
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
Control system can be reactivated by pushing the
selected speed.
Speed Control on/off button and resetting the  If the button is continually pushed, the set
desired vehicle set speed. NOTE: speed will continue to increase until the button
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed is released, then the new set speed will be
To Activate and on level ground before setting the speed. established.
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Metric Speed (km/h)
Control. The cruise indicator light in the instru- To Vary The Speed Setting
ment cluster display will illuminate. To turn the To Increase Speed  Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 5
system off, push the on/off button a second 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase quent tap of the button results in an increase of
time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
system should be turned off when not in use. 1 km/h.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
 If the button is continually pushed, the set
WARNING! through the Uconnect settings (if equipped).
speed will continue to increase until the button
Refer to ”Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” is released, then the new set speed will be
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
for more information. The speed increment is established.
not in use is dangerous. You could
dependent on the selected speed unit of U.S.
accidentally set the system or cause it to go
(mph) or Metric (km/h): To Decrease Speed
faster than you want. You could lose control
and have an accident. Always leave the When the Speed Control is set, you can
system off when you are not using it. decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected To Accelerate For Passing To Resume Speed
through the Uconnect settings (if equipped).
Press the accelerator as you would normally. To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
Refer to "Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will button and release. Resume can be used at any
further information. The speed decrement is
return to the set speed. speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
dependent on the selected speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h): Using Speed Control On Hills To Deactivate
U.S. Speed (mph) A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
The transmission may downshift on hills to
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing
 Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a maintain the vehicle set speed.
the vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control
1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
NOTE: without erasing the set speed from memory.
quent tap of the button results in a decrease of
The Speed Control system maintains speed up Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition
1 mph.
and down hills. A slight speed change on in the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position erases the set
 If the button is continually pushed, the set moderate hills is normal. speed from memory.
speed will continue to decrease until the
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
button is released, then the new set speed will
occur so it may be preferable to drive without
REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
be established.
Speed Control. The Rear Park Assist system provides an
Metric Speed (km/h) audible indication of the distance between the
 Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a WARNING!
rear fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle
1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse- Speed Control can be dangerous where the when backing up (e.g. during a parking
quent tap of the button results in a decrease of system cannot maintain a constant speed. maneuver), as well as visual indications in the
1 km/h. Your vehicle could go too fast for the instrument cluster display.
 If the button is continually pushed, the set conditions, and you could lose control and
speed will continue to decrease until the have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
button is released, then the new set speed will in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
be established. icy, snow-covered or slippery.
Rear Park Assist is automatically activated Rear Park Assist Sensors Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts
when the transmission is placed into REVERSE.
The four Rear Park Assist sensors, located in If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when the
As the distance from an obstacle behind the
the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area transmission is placed into REVERSE, an
vehicle decreases, the audible alert becomes
behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ audible alert is activated.
more frequent.
field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles, The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform
For the limitations of this system and recom- in the horizontal direction, from approximately the driver that the vehicle is approaching an
mendations, refer to the “Park Assist System 12 inches (30 cm) up to 55 inches (140 cm) obstacle. The pauses between the tones are
Usage Precautions” in this section. from the center of the rear fascia/bumper and directly proportional to the distance from the
Interaction With Trailer Towing up to 24 inches (60 cm) from the corners of the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succession
rear fascia/bumper, depending on the location, indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A
The Rear Park Assist system is automatically type and orientation of the obstacle.
deactivated when a trailer is hitched to the continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is
vehicle. The system will be automatically acti- If several obstacles are detected, the Rear Park less than 12 inches (30 cm) away. 5
vated as soon as the trailer is removed. Assist system indicates the nearest obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle
corresponds to the maximum height of an
obstacle that would clear the underside of the
vehicle during the parking maneuver.
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System
SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
Obstacle Distance An obstacle is present within the sensors' field Audible Signal (dashboard loudspeaker)
of view • Sound pulses emitted at a rate that
increases as the distance decreases.
• Emits continuous tone at 12 inches (30 cm).
• Adjustable volume level. (Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information).
Failure Sensor or System failures Visual Signal (instrument panel)
• Icon appears on display.
• Message is displayed on the instrument
cluster display (if equipped).
While audible signals are emitted, the audio Indications On Display — If Equipped If an obstacle is detected in the rear central
system is not muted. area, the instrument cluster display shows all
When the sensors are activated, the parking
The audible signal is turned off immediately if the arcs in the rear central area, up to the one
sensor display screen appears in the instru-
the distance increases. The tone cycle remains that corresponds to the position of the obstacle
ment cluster.
constant if the distance measured by the inner itself.
Obstacle presence and distance information is
sensors is constant. If this condition occurs for The signal is similar for obstacles in the rear left
therefore provided both by the audible signal
the external sensors, the signal is turned off or right area.
and the instrument cluster display.
after three seconds (stopping warnings during The arc that corresponds to the position of the
maneuvers parallel to walls). The system indicates a detected obstacle by
obstacle will flash.
displaying an arc in one or more positions
according to the distance of the obstacle and its The color on the instrument cluster display
position in relation to the vehicle. depends on the distance from and position of
the obstacle.
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the single sensor fails, the entire system must be slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can
instrument cluster display shows a single disabled. The system is turned off automati- result in the system not working properly. The
constant arc and emits a continuous sound. cally. Rear Park Assist system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could
If there are several obstacles, the closest one is Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System
provide a false indication that an obstacle is
indicated.
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, behind the fascia/bumper.
Failure Indications car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use
rough or hard cloths. In washing stations, clean  Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not
A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or be placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the
system is indicated, during REVERSE gear sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high pres-
rear fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle.
engagement, by the instrument panel warning sure washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm)
Failure to do so can result in the system misin-
icon and message appearing on the instrument from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the
terpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
cluster display. sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
causing a failure indication to be displayed in 5
sensors.
The warning icon is illuminated and a the instrument cluster.
message appears on the instrument Park Assist System Usage Precautions
cluster display. Refer to "Instrument NOTE: WARNING!
Cluster Display" in “Getting To Know  Drivers must be careful when backing up
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.  Ensure that the outer surface and the under-
even when using Rear Park Assist. Always
side of the rear bumper is clean and clear of
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously check carefully behind your vehicle, look
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction to
when the ignition is in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) behind you, and be sure to check for pedes-
keep the Rear Park Assist system operating
position. Failures are indicated immediately if trians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
properly.
they occur when the system is on. and blind spots before backing up. You are
 Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra- responsible for safety and must continue to
Even if the system is able to identify that a pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to
tions could affect the performance of Rear
specific sensor is in failure condition, the instru- do so can result in serious injury or death.
Park Assist.
ment cluster display shall indicate that the Rear
(Continued)
Park Assist system is unavailable, without refer-  Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly,
ence to the sensor in failure condition. If even a taking care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the

WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) rear camera mode is exited and the last
 Before using Rear Park Assist, it is strongly  The vehicle must be driven slowly when using selected touchscreen appears again.
recommended that the ball mount and hitch Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay
ball assembly is disconnected from the time when an obstacle is detected. It is feature and it is turned on, the rear camera
vehicle when the vehicle is not used for recommended that the driver looks over his/ image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or her shoulder when using Rear Park Assist.
when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
If it’s necessary to keep the ball mount and unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle
hitch ball assembly mounted for a long period, (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK
than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
it is possible to filter out the ball mount and or the vehicle's ignition is placed in the STOP
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the
hitch ball assembly presence in sensor field of (OFF/LOCK) position.
sensors could detect the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly, depending on its size view. The filtering operation must be performed When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid
and shape, giving a false indication that an only by an authorized dealer. on the image to illustrate the width of the
obstacle is behind the vehicle. vehicle and its projected backup path based on
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA the steering wheel position. A dashed center
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
CAUTION! assist with parking.
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an
 Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is on-screen image of the rear surroundings of When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on
unable to recognize every obstacle, including your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be into REVERSE. The image will be displayed in
temporarily detected or not detected at all. NOTE:
the touchscreen display along with a caution
Obstacles located above or below the The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has
note to “check entire surroundings” across the
sensors will not be detected when they are in programmable modes of operation that may be
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note
close proximity. selected through the Uconnect System. Refer to
will disappear. The ParkView camera is located
(Continued) “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license
information.
plate.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
NOTE:
WARNING! CAUTION! If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
Drivers must be careful when backing up  To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do 5
Camera. Always check carefully behind your camera is unable to view every obstacle or not cover the lens.
vehicle, and be sure to check for object in your drive path.
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,  To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
obstructions, or blind spots before backing driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
up. You are responsible for the safety of your to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
surroundings and must continue to pay recommended that the driver look frequently
attention while backing up. Failure to do so over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
can result in serious injury or death.
ADDING FUEL WARNING!

1. Open the fuel filler door.  Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
2. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door the tank is being filled.
inside the pipe seals the system.
 Never add fuel when the engine is running.
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler This is in violation of most state and federal
pipe – the nozzle opens and holds the fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunc-
flapper door while refueling. tion Indicator Light” to turn on.
Funnel Location For Vehicle With Optional Spare Tire
NOTE:  A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
allowing the flapper door to open. You could be burned. Always place fuel
containers on the ground while filling.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is
full. CAUTION!
5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
door. “top off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE:
Emergency Fuel Filling
A funnel is provided (located in the tool bag or
cargo floor area in the rear cargo area) to open
the flapper door to allow for emergency refueling
with a gas can.
VEHICLE LOADING Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on
Certification Label
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle, the front and rear axles. The load must be
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety options and cargo. The label also specifies distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a maximum capacities of front and rear axle of each axle is not exceeded.
certification label affixed to the driver's side systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so Each axle GAWR is determined by the compo-
door or pillar. GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not nents in the system with the lowest load
This label contains the month and year of manu- exceeded. carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
facture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Heavier axles or suspension components some-
Payload
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear, times specified by purchasers for increased
and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). A The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allow- durability does not necessarily increase the
Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on able load weight a truck can carry, including the vehicle's GVWR. 5
this label and indicates the Month, Day and weight of the driver, all passengers, options and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that cargo. Tire Size
appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN. The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size Loading Improper weight distributions can have an

adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire The actual total weight and the weight of the
and handles and the way the brakes operate.
size listed. front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can
best be determined by weighing it when it is CAUTION!
Inflation Pressure loaded and ready for operation.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR.
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
GAWR. not been exceeded. The weight on the front and it can change the way your vehicle handles.
rear of the vehicle should then be determined This could cause you to lose control. Also
Curb Weight separately to be sure that the load is properly overloading can shorten the life of your
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the distributed over the front and rear axle. vehicle.
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR
including vehicle fuel, at full capacity condi- of either the front or rear axles has been
exceeded but the total load is within the speci-
TRAILER TOWING
tions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight fied GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recom-
values are determined by weighing your vehicle front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until mended.
on a commercial scale before any occupants or the specified weight limitations are met. Store
cargo are added. the heavier items down low and be sure that the
weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose
items securely before driving.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Automatic Transmission

Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details. 5
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
This vehicle may also be towed using a tow dolly (with the front wheels OFF the ground).
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

 DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an  Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
automatic transmission. Damage to the requirements can cause severe transmission
drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require damage. Damage from improper towing is
towing, make sure all drive wheels are OFF not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
the ground. Warranty.
(Continued)
DRIVING TIPS Traction Driving Through Water

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is Driving through water more than a few inches/
Driving On Slippery Surfaces centimeters deep will require extra caution to
possible for a wedge of water to build up
Information in this section will aid in safe between the tire and road surface. This is hydro- ensure safety and prevent damage to your
controlled launches in adverse conditions. planing and may cause partial or complete loss vehicle.
of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
Acceleration reduce this possibility, the following precau- Flowing/Rising Water
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or tions should be observed:
other slippery surfaces may cause the driving  Slow down during rainstorms or when the
WARNING!
wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This roads are slushy. Do not drive on or across a road or path
phenomenon occurs when there is a difference where water is flowing and/or rising (as in
 Slow down if the road has standing water or
in the surface traction under the front (driving) storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away
puddles.
wheels. the road or path's surface and cause your
 Replace the tires when tread wear indicators vehicle to sink into deeper water.
WARNING! first become visible. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to
 Keep tires properly inflated.
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause follow this warning may result in injuries that
sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could  Maintain sufficient distance between your are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
lose control of the vehicle and possibly have vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid and others around you.
a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully a collision in a sudden stop.
whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Shallow Standing Water

CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
 Always check the depth of the standing water  Driving through standing water may cause
through shallow standing water, consider
before driving through it. Never drive through damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
the following “Warnings and Cautions”
standing water that is deeper than the nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
before doing so.
bottom of the tire rims mounted on the (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
WARNING! vehicle. signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky
 Determine the condition of the road or the or foamy in appearance) after driving through
 Driving through standing water limits your standing water. Do not continue to operate
path that is under water and if there are any
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
obstacles in the way before driving through
5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through nated, as this may result in further damage.
the standing water.
standing water. Such damage is not covered by the New
 Driving through standing water limits your
 Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving Vehicle Limited Warranty. 5
through standing water. This will minimize
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which  Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine
wave effects.
increases stopping distances. Therefore, can cause it to lock up and stall out, and
after driving through standing water, drive (Continued)
cause serious internal damage to the engine.
slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal Such damage is not covered by the New
several times to dry the brakes. Vehicle Limited Warranty.
 Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
142
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of
an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assis-
tance, the Hazard Warning flashers will
The Hazard Warning flashers switch is located turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. continue to operate even though the ignition is
on the instrument panel, below the radio. This is an emergency warning system and it placed in the OFF position.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard should not be used when the vehicle is in NOTE:
Warning flashers. When the switch is motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
activated, all directional turn signals it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. may wear down your battery.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number

Overhead Lamp C5W
Sun Visors C5W
Courtesy Lamp W5W
Glove Compartment C5W
Rear Courtesy Lamp C5W
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 143
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number

Front Low and High Beam Headlamp HIR2LL
Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Front Parking LED (See Authorized Dealer)
Daytime Running Lamps W21W
Front Side Marker Lamps LED (See Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail/Stop Lamps P21/5W
Rear Tail Lamp LED (See Authorized Dealer)
Rear Turn Signal Lamps P21W
Rear Backup Lamps W16W
6
Rear Side Marker Lamps LED (See Authorized Dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp LED (See Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamps H11
Rear Fog Lamps - If Equipped W16W
License Plate Lamps W5W
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer or
refer to the applicable Service Manual.
144 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Replacing Exterior Bulbs 2. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector from
the bulb.
Headlamps Low Beam And High Beam
1. Remove the plastic sealing cap from the
back of the headlamp housing by turning it
counterclockwise.
Bulb Removal Procedure

Electrical Connector Removal
3. Remove the bulb when all the tabs are
aligned with the openings in the metal 5. Install the new bulb and rotate clockwise to
holder. lock in place.
Headlamp Sealing Cap Removal
New Bulb Installation

6. Reinstall the plastic cap. 4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal
remove. Lamps
5. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate 1. Open the liftgate.
bulb/socket clockwise into lamp locking it
in place. 2. Remove the tail lamp access panel.
6. Reinstall the plastic cap and close the 3. Remove the two screws that secure the tail
cover on the wheel liner. lamp to the body of the vehicle.
4. Remove the tail lamp assembly.
Front Fog Lamps
5. Remove the two screws that secure the
To replace the front fog lights, see an autho-
Headlamp Sealing Cap Installation backplate to the tail lamp housing.
rized dealer.
Front Turn Signal And Daytime Running 6. Separate the backplate from the tail lamp
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps housing.
Lamps 6
The front/rear side marker lamps are LED and 7. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs
1. Turn front wheels inboard to access upper not serviced separately. See an authorized
cover in wheel liner. by pushing them slightly and turning coun-
dealer for replacement of these lights. terclockwise.
2. Open the upper cover on the front of the
wheel liner. 8. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling
straight out.
3. Remove the cap from the back of the lower
headlamp housing. 9. Replace lamps as required and reinstall
lamp.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) General Information Underhood Fuses
This light is an LED assembly. See an authorized The fuses protect electrical systems against The Front Distribution Unit is located on the
dealer for replacement. excessive current. right side of the engine compartment, next to
When a device does not work, you must check the battery. To access the fuses, push the
FUSES the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a release tabs and remove the cover.
break/melt.
WARNING!
Also, please be aware that when using power
 When replacing a blown fuse, always use an outlets for extended periods of time with the
appropriate replacement fuse with the same engine off may result in vehicle battery
amp rating as the original fuse. Never
discharge.
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or
vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses may
result in serious personal injury, fire and/or Front Distribution Unit
property damage. The ID number of the electrical component
 Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the corresponding to each fuse can be found on the
ignition is off and that all the other services back of the cover.
are switched off and/or disengaged.
 If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an Blade Fuses
authorized dealer. 1 — Fuse Element
 If a general protection fuse for safety systems 2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element.
(air bag system, braking system), power unit 3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
systems (engine system, transmission element (blown fuse).
system) or steering system blows, contact an
authorized dealer.
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description

F01 70 Amp Tan – Body Controller
F02 60 Amp Blue – Body Controller Rear Distribution Unit
F03 20 Amp Yellow – Ignition Switch
F04 40 Amp Orange – Anti-Lock Brake Pump
F05 70 Amp Tan – Electric Power Steering
F06 30 Amp Green – Radiator Fan - Low Speed
F07 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan - High Speed
F08 40 Amp Orange – Blower Motor
F09 – 7.5 Amp Brown Transmission (Aisin)
F10 – 15 Amp Blue Horn
6
F11 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain
F15 – 10 Amp Red Transmission (Aisin)
F16 – 7.5 Amp Brown Transmission Powertrain
F17 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain
F18 – 5 Amp Tan Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped)
F19 – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning
F20 – 30 Amp Green Rear Defroster
F21 – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump
F22 – 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain
F23 – 20 Amp Yellow Anti-Lock Brake Valves
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description

F30 – 5 Amp Tan After Run Pump
F81 70 Amp Tan – PTC (Secondary)
F83 40 Amp Orange – PTC (Primary)
F85 – 15 Amp Blue Front Power Outlet 12 Volts
F86 – 7.5 Amp Brown USB Charger Sockets
F88 – 7.5 Amp Brown Heated Mirrors
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body
Control Module (BCM) and is located on the
driver's side under the instrument panel. To
access the fuses, pull on the cover.
Interior Fuse Panel

Fuse Panel Cavity Locations

Cavity Vehicle Fuse Number Mini Fuse Description

1 F12 7.5 Amp Brown Right Low Beam
2 F32 7.5 Amp Brown Front and Rear Ceiling Lights Trunk and Door Courtesy
Lights
3 F53 7.5 Amp Brown Instrument Panel Node
4 F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Door Locking
5 F36 15 Amp Blue Diagnostic Socket, Vehicle Radio, Climate Control
System, TPMS, Sunroof
6 F90 7.5 Amp Brown Left High Beam
7 F91 7.5 Amp Brown Right High Beam
8 F92 7.5 Amp Brown Left Fog Light
9 F93 7.5 Amp Brown Right Fog Light
10 F42 5 Amp Tan BSM, ESP
11 F33 20 Amp Yellow Rear Left Passenger Window
12 F34 20 Amp Yellow Rear Right Passenger Window
13 F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-Directional Washer
14 F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Window
15 F13 7.5 Amp Brown Left Low Beam, Headlamp Leveling
16 F50 7.5 Amp Brown Airbag
17 F51 5 Amp Tan Vehicle Radio Switch, Climate Control System, Stop Light,
Reverse Gear, Sunroof, Parking Sensor, Rear Camera
18 F37 7.5 Amp Brown Stop Light Switch, Instrument Panel Node
19 F49 5 Amp Tan Exterior Mirror, GPS, Electric Mirror, Parking Sensor

20 F31 5 Amp Tan Climate Control, Seat Regulation
21 F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Window
Rear Interior Fuses

The rear interior fuse panel is located on the
driver's side in the rear compartment.To access
the fuses, pull on the cover.
Rear Fuse Panel


1 F61 15 Amp Blue Lumbar Regulation Seats
2 F62 15 Amp Blue Heated Seats
3 F64 20 Amp Yellow Hi Fi System
4 F65 20 Amp Yellow Sun Blind
5 F66 20 Amp Yellow Sunroof
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF WARNING! (Continued)

Removal Of Jack And Tools
To access the jack and jack tools, you must
EQUIPPED  Never start or run the engine while the remove the cargo floor cover located in the
vehicle is on a jack. cargo area.To remove the cover, place your
WARNING!  The jack is designed to be used as a tool for hand in cargo floor handle and lift up and
 Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of changing tires only. The jack should not be towards the rear of the vehicle.
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
enough off the road to avoid the danger of The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
being hit when operating the jack or changing surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
the wheel.
 Being under a jacked-up vehicle is Jack Location
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack The spare tire jack is located in the rear cargo
and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never area underneath the cargo floor.
put any part of your body under a vehicle that
is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift. Cargo Floor Handle
(Continued)
To remove pull up on the cover.
Jack and Jack Handle/Lug Wrench Winch Location

1 — Jack Handle/Lug Wrench
Jack And Tools Cover 3. Rotate the lug wrench handle until the
2 — Jack spare tire is on the ground with enough
cable slack to allow you to pull it out from
Spare Tire Removal under the vehicle. 6
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack
up the vehicle. The spare tire is stowed in under-
neath the rear cargo area on the outside of the
vehicle.
1. Remove the cargo floor to access the
winch.
Jack And Jack Tools
2. Remove the jack handle and insert the lug
1 — Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel
wrench end into the winch mechanism.
2 — Emergency Screw Driver
3 — Jack
Wrench Rotation
4 — Jack Handle/Lug Wrench
4. Pull the spare tire out from the under 6. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
vehicle to gain access to the spare tire clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of
CAUTION!
retainer. the cable. The winch mechanism is designed for use
with the jack wrench extension tool only. Use
of air wrench or power tool may damage the
winch.
Preparations For Jacking

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
Pulling The Spare Tire Out Gaining Access To The Retainer
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
5. Loosen the spare tire retainer nut to 7. Pull the retainer through the center of the enough off the road to avoid being hit when
remove the retainer. wheel. operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.

3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Place the ignition in OFF mode.
Spare Tire Retainer Nut Pulling The Retainer Through The Center Of the Wheel
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel Jacking Instructions
diagonally opposite the jacking position. WARNING! (Continued)
For example, if the driver’s front wheel is WARNING!  Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
being changed, block the passenger’s rear jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
wheel. take it to a service center where it can be
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
raised on a lift.
your vehicle:
 Only use the jack in the positions indicated
 Always park on a firm, level surface as far
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
from the edge of the roadway as possible
change.
before raising the vehicle.
 If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
 Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
careful of motor traffic.
 Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
 To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
transmission in PARK.
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
 Block the wheel diagonally opposite the the valve stem facing the ground. 6
Wheel Blocked wheel to be raised.
NOTE:  Never start or run the engine with the vehicle

Passengers should not remain in the vehicle on a jack.
when the vehicle is being jacked.  Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is
on a jack.
(Continued)
Jack Warning Label

3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel

CAUTION! bolt wrench to loosen, but not remove, the
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking wheel bolts on the wheel with the flat tire.
on locations other than those indicated in Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one
the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle. turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack and wheel bolt

wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where
the center cap covers the wheel bolts, use Front Jacking Location
the wheel bolt wrench to pry the center cap
off carefully before raising the vehicle.
Jack Placement
Rear Lifting Point
Center Cap Removal
Front Lifting Point

NOTE:
WARNING!
 For vehicles so equipped, do not
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary
attempt to install a center cap or wheel
can make the vehicle less stable. It could
cover on the compact spare.
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it.
Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the  Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Main-
tire. tenance” for additional warnings,
cautions, and information about the
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire. spare tire, its use, and operation.
Rear Jacking Location 8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded
7. Mount the spare tire.
NOTE: end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel.
There are front and rear jacking locations on CAUTION! Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
each side of the body (as indicated by the trian- Be sure to mount the spare tire with the
gular lift point symbols on the sill molding.) WARNING! 6
valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could
be damaged if the spare tire is mounted  To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that
incorrectly. jack, do not tighten the wheel bolts fully until
is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack
follow this warning may result in personal
saddle with the lift area of the sill flange,
injury.
centering the jack saddle between the
locating notches on the sill flange.  To avoid possible personal injury, handle the
wheel covers with care to avoid contact with
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove any sharp edges.
the flat tire and install the spare tire.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning Reinstalling The Jack And Tools 2. Place cover over jack and jack tools.
the jack handle counterclockwise.
1. Securely stow the jack and jack tools in the
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push cargo area.
down on the wrench while at the end of the
handle for increased leverage. Tighten the
wheel bolts in a star pattern until each
wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer
to “Wheel And Tire Torque Specifications”
in “Technical Specifications” for proper lug
nut torque. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a
Jack And Tool Cover
torque wrench by an authorized dealer or
at a service station. 3. Place hand in cargo floor cover handle and
Jack And Jack Tools install back into cargo area.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire.
1 — Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel
2 — Emergency Screw Driver
WARNING! 3 — Jack
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a 4 — Jack Handle/Lug Wrench
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
jack parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Cargo Floor Handle

Spare Tire Storage TIRE SERVICE KIT Tire punctures of up to 1/4 of an inch (6mm)
can be repaired; the kit can be used in all
Rotate the jack wrench tool clockwise on the
If a tire is punctured, you can make a first emer- weather conditions. Do not remove the
winch drive nut (The flat tire must not be
gency repair using the Tire Service Kit located in foreign object from the punctured tire, i.e.,
connected to the winch) until effort becomes
the rear storage area under the cargo floor. screw or nail.
heavy and an audible click is heard indicating
the winch is properly stowed. Remove the Tire Service Kit from the vehicle,
take it out from the bag and place it near the
punctured tire. Screw the clear flexible filling
tube to the tire valve.
WARNING!
 Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit
6
when using the Tire Service Kit.
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Power Button  Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
Wrench Rotation
2 — Pressure Gauge under the following circumstances:
Cover the flat tire with the Emergency Spare Tire
3 — Sealant Bottle  If the puncture in the tire tread is
Bag (If equipped) and stow the flat tire into the
4 — Sealant Hose (Clear) approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or
cargo area.
5 — Power Plug (located on bottom side of Tire larger.
NOTE: Service Kit)  If the tire has any sidewall damage.
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or  If the tire has any damage from driving
other power tools is not recommended and can with extremely low tire pressure.
damage the winch.  If the tire has any damage from driving
on a flat tire.
(Continued)
When the correct pressure has been reached,

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) start driving the vehicle to uniformly distribute
 If the wheel has any damage.  Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains the sealant inside the tire. After 10 minutes,
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, stop and check the tire pressure. If the pressure
 If you are unsure of the condition of
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not drive the
the tire or the wheel.
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal- vehicle, as the tire is too damaged, contact the
 Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty nearest authorized dealer.
or heat source. of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
 A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a induce vomiting! Consult a physician immedi- WARNING!
collision or hard stop could endanger the ately. Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired
Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to Insert the power plug into the vehicle power or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do
follow these warnings can result in injuries outlet socket and start the vehicle engine. not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire
that are serious or fatal to you, your passen- Push the Tire Service Kit power button to the “I” is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
gers, and others around you. position. The electric compressor will be turned warning can result in injuries that are
 Take care not to allow the contents of Tire on, sealant and air will inflate the tire. serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, others around you. Have the tire checked as
Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure should be soon as possible at an authorized dealer.
or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful
reached within 20 minutes. If the pressure has
if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through
not been reached, turn off and remove the Tire
the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or above,
Service Kit, drive the vehicle 30 feet
irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of repeat the inflation process to reach the correct
(10 meters) back and forth, to better distribute
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. tire pressure and continue driving.
the sealant inside the tire.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there
Attach the clear flexible sealant hose of the Peel off the warning label from the bottle and
is any contact with clothing.
compressor directly to the tire valve and repeat place it on the dashboard as a reminder to the
(Continued)
the inflation process. driver that the tire has been treated with the
Tire Service Kit.
WARNING! WARNING! CAUTION!

The metal end fitting from Power Plug may Store the sealant canister in its special Do not use a portable battery booster pack
get hot after use, so it should be handled compartment, away from sources of heat. or any other booster source with a system
carefully. Failure to follow this WARNING may result in voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
sealant canister rupture and serious injury the battery, starter motor, alternator or
NOTE: or death. electrical system may occur.
Replace the sealant canister prior to the expira-
Preparations For Jump Start
tion date at an authorized dealer. JUMP STARTING The battery in your vehicle is located on the
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can driver’s side of the engine compartment.
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please 6
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
and precautions.
Positive Battery Post
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the Connecting The Jumper Cables
WARNING! battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper
 Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan cables reach, set the parking brake and
cable to the positive (+) post of the
whenever the hood is raised. It can start make sure the ignition is OFF.
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be discharged vehicle.
injured by moving fan blades. 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive
WARNING!
 Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as the booster battery.
watch bands and bracelets that could make
this could establish a ground connection
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could
and personal injury could result. 3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
be seriously injured.
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
 Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn battery.
Jump Starting Procedure
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
WARNING! (-) jumper cable to a good engine ground
flames or sparks away from the battery.
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure (exposed metal part of the discharged
could result in personal injury or property vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
1. Apply the parking brake, place the trans-
damage due to battery explosion. and the fuel injection system.
mission in PARK (P) and turn the ignition
OFF.
WARNING!
2. Turn off the heater, radio and all unneces- CAUTION! Do not connect the jumper cable to the
sary electrical accessories. Failure to follow these procedures could negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
3. Remove the protective cover over the result in damage to the charging system of The resulting electrical spark could cause
remote positive (+) battery post. To remove the booster vehicle or the discharged the battery to explode and could result in
the cover, pull upward on the cover. vehicle. personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other
exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the NOTE:

booster battery, let the engine idle a few
CAUTION! There are steps that you can take to slow down
minutes, and then start the engine in the Accessories plugged into the vehicle power an impending overheat condition:
vehicle with the discharged battery. outlets draw power from the vehicle’s
 If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The
battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular
6. Once the engine is started, remove the A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling
devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
jumper cables in the reverse sequence. system and turning the A/C off can help
enough without engine operation, the
remove this heat.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the  You can also turn the temperature control to
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the engine from starting. maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
jumper cable from the engine ground of the blower control to high. This allows the
the vehicle with the discharged battery. IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS heater core to act as a supplement to the radi-
ator and aids in removing heat from the engine
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the nega- In any of the following situations, you can cooling system.
tive (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) reduce the potential for overheating by taking 6
post of the booster battery. the appropriate action. WARNING!
3. Disconnect the positive (+) jumper cable  On the highways — slow down.
You or others can be badly burned by hot
from the positive (+) post of the booster
 In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans- engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
battery.
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase your radiator. If you see or hear steam
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the posi- engine idle speed. coming from under the hood, do not open
tive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) the hood until the radiator has had time to
post of the discharged vehicle. cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant
If frequent jump starting is required to start your bottle is hot.
vehicle, the battery and charging system should
be inspected at an authorized dealer.
3. Unlock the steering column, pull the tilt/ 6. Pull the release tab downwards using one
CAUTION! telescoping control handle down. hand and with the other one remove the
Driving with a hot cooling system could key, sliding it outwards.
4. Pull the steering wheel outward until it is in
damage your vehicle. If the pointer rises to
the end of the travel position, then lock the
the H (red) mark, the instrument cluster will
steering column in position, push the
sound a chime. When safe, pull over and
control handle up until fully engaged.
stop the vehicle with the engine at idle. Turn
off the air conditioning and wait until the 5. Using the Allen key, undo the lower
pointer drops back into the normal range. If steering column cover screws, and remove
the pointer remains on the H (red) mark for the lower cover.
more than a minute, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE Release Tab Location
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park 7. Once the key is removed, reinstall the
Interlock which requires the transmission to be steering column cover.
in PARK (P) before the ignition switch can be
turned to the LOCK/OFF (key removal) position. CAUTION!
To remove the key manually, proceed as
It is advisable to contact an authorized
follows: Lower Steering Column Screw Locations dealer to have the reinstall procedure
1. Firmly apply the parking brake. carried out. If you would like to proceed in
performing the reinstall procedure special
2. Remove the Allen Key located in the rear attention must be paid to the correct
cargo area, in the tool bag (if equipped) or coupling of the clips. Otherwise damage to
on the left side in the cargo box. the cover or noise might be heard due to
incorrect fastening of the lower cover.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE NOTE:

When inserting the screwdriver, keep it as
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector vertical as possible during the override operation. If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
cannot be moved out of the PARK (P) position, snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL (N)
you can use the following procedure to tempo- motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
position.
rarily move the gear selector: clear the area around the front wheels. Push
7. The vehicle may then be started in and hold the lock button on the gear selector.
1. Turn the engine OFF.
NEUTRAL (N). Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE (D)
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. and REVERSE (R), while gently pressing the
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot. accelerator. Use the least amount of acceler-
3. By pulling the gear selector boot, carefully ator pedal pressure that will maintain the
separate the gear selector bezel and boot rocking motion, without spinning the wheels, or
assembly from the center console, and racing the engine.
raise it up to access the gear selector
mechanism. NOTE:
6
Push the "ESC OFF" switch, to place the Elec-
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in "Partial
brake pedal. Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to
5. Insert the equipped screwdriver or similar “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Safety” for
tool into the gear selector override access further information. Once the vehicle has been
hole (at the right front corner of the gear Gear Selector Override freed, push the "ESC OFF" switch again to restore
selector assembly) and push and hold the 1 — Raised Gear Selector Boot "ESC On" mode.
override release lever down. 2 — Gear Selector Override Access Hole
WARNING! CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces  Racing the engine or spinning the wheels  When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
generated by excessive wheel speeds may may lead to transmission overheating and between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle failure. Allow the engine to idle with the trans- the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
and tires. A tire could explode and injure mission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute drivetrain damage may result.
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels after every five rocking-motion cycles. This  Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer will minimize overheating and reduce the risk too fast may lead to transmission over-
than 30 seconds continuously without of transmission failure during prolonged heating and failure. It can also damage the
stopping when you are stuck and do not let efforts to free a stuck vehicle. tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter (Continued) (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
what the speed. shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

NOTE:
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to If you must use the accessories (wipers,
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow CAUTION! defroster, etc.) while being towed, the key must
bars and other equipment designed for this  Do not use sling type equipment when be in the ON/RUN position. 6
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s towing. Vehicle damage may occur.  Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. elevated.
 When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck,
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main do not attach to front or rear suspension
structural members of the vehicle, not to  Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all
components. Damage to your vehicle may wheels off the ground).
bumpers or associated brackets. State and result from improper towing.
local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be If the ignition key is unavailable, or the vehicle’s
observed. battery is discharged, refer to “Gear Selector
Override” in this section for instructions on
shifting the transmission out of PARK in order to
move the vehicle.
CAUTION! ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)

 DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an (EARS) This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
automatic transmission. Damage to the Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Acci- to record data that will assist in understanding
towing, make sure all drive wheels are OFF dent Response System. how a vehicle’s systems performed under
the ground. Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
 Towing this vehicle in violation of the above “Safety” for further information on the as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
requirements can cause severe transmission Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) obstacle.
damage. Damage from improper towing is function. Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited “Safety” for further information on the Event
Warranty. Data Recorder (EDR).
169
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the sched-
Severe Duty All Models
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil uled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
change indicator system. The oil change indi- performed by someone other than an autho- operated in a dusty and off-road environment,
cator system will remind you that it is time to rized dealer, the message can be reset by refer- or is operated predominately at idle or only very
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. ring to the steps described under “Instrument low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your considered Severe Duty.
change indicator message will illuminate in the Instrument Panel” for further information.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
instrument cluster. This means that service is NOTE:  Check engine oil level
required for your vehicle. Operating conditions Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow and vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),  Check windshield washer fluid level
extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will 12 months, or 350 hours of engine run time,
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change  Check the tire inflation pressures and look for
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
Required” message is displayed. Severe oper- unusual wear or damage
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
ating conditions can cause the change oil fleet customers.  Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, 7
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles and brake master cylinder reservoir, and fill as
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle needed
serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).  Check function of all interior and exterior lights
170 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Plan
At Every Oil Change Interval As At Every Oil Change Interval As
Required Maintenance Intervals Indicated By Oil Change Indicator Indicated By Oil Change Indicator
Refer to the maintenance plan on the following System: System:
pages for the required maintenance intervals.  Change oil and filter  Inspect engine cooling system protection and
 Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of hoses
irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil  Check and adjust hand brake
indicator system turns on.  Inspect exhaust system
 Inspect battery and clean and tighten termi-  Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
nals as required off-road conditions
 Inspect the CV/Universal joints
 Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums,
and hoses
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 171
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first):
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
X
ends and boot seals, and replace if X X X X X X
necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, parking
brake function.
X X X X X X X 7
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace brake fluid every two years. 1 X X X X X X X
Clean and lube sunroof tracks — if
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
equipped.
Replace spark plugs. 2 X X X X X
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first):
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Flush and replace the engine

coolant at 10 years or 150,
X X
000 miles (240,000 km), whichever
comes first.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
X
necessary.
Replace the timing belt. X
1. The brake fluid change interval is time based only, mileage intervals do not apply.
2. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle

Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
 You can be badly injured working on or  Failure to properly inspect and maintain your 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
around a motor vehicle. Do only service work vehicle could result in a component malfunc- operated in a dusty and off road environment or
for which you have the knowledge and the tion and effect vehicle handling and perfor-
is operated predominately at idle or only very
right equipment. If you have any doubt about mance. This could cause an accident.
low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is
your ability to perform a service job, take your
considered Severe Duty.
vehicle to a competent mechanic.
(Continued)
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap

2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle
4 — Battery 9 — Oil Fill Cap
5 — Front Distribution Unit (Fuses)
Checking Oil Level

CAUTION! WARNING!
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will  Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
oil must be maintained at the correct level.
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as
could damage your engine. battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
every fuel stop. The best time to check the
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
Adding Washer Fluid attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or
warmed up engine is shut off.
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located on skin, flush the area immediately with large
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting
in the engine compartment, and the fluid level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
should be checked at regular intervals. Fill the
readings. further information.
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
There are four possible dipstick types; engine coolant/antifreeze). Refer to “Engine  Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
 Crosshatched zone Compartment” in this section for further infor- flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
mation. use a booster battery or any other booster
 Crosshatched zone marked SAFE source with an output greater than 12 Volts.
WARNING! Do not allow cable clamps to touch each
 Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the Commercially available windshield washer other.
range solvents are flammable. They could ignite  Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
and burn you. Care must be exercised when sories contain lead and lead compounds.
 Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the
filling or working around the washer solution. Wash hands after handling.
MIN and the MAX ends of the range
 The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose
NOTE: Maintenance-Free Battery that should not be disconnected and should
Always maintain the oil level within the cross- only be replaced with a battery of the same
hatch markings on the dipstick. Your vehicle is equipped with a mainte-
nance-free battery. You will never have to add type (vented).
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
reading is at the low end of the dipstick range
will raise the oil level to the high end of the
range marking.
CAUTION! DEALER SERVICE Engine Oil
 It is essential when replacing the cables on An authorized dealer has the qualified service Change Engine Oil
the battery that the positive cable is attached personnel, special tools, and equipment to The oil change indicator system will remind you
to the positive post and the negative cable is perform all service operations in an expert that it is time to take your vehicle in for sched-
attached to the negative post. Battery posts manner. Service Manuals are available which uled maintenance. Refer to the “Maintenance
are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and include detailed service information for your Plan” for further information.
are identified on the battery case. Cable vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
clamps should be tight on the terminal posts attempting any procedure yourself. NOTE:
and free of corrosion. Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
NOTE: vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
 If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is Intentional tampering with emissions control
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle 12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
systems may void your warranty and could result whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
battery cables before connecting the charger in civil penalties being assessed against you.
to the battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to run or idle time is generally only a concern for
provide starting voltage. fleet customers.
WARNING!
Pressure Washing Engine Oil Selection
You can be badly injured working on or 7
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work For the best performance and maximum protec-
CAUTION! for which you have the knowledge and the tion for turbocharged engines under all types of
Cleaning the engine compartment with a proper equipment. If you have any doubt operating conditions, the manufacturer recom-
high pressure washer is not recommended. about your ability to perform a service job, mends synthetic engine oils that are API Certi-
Precautions have been taken to safeguard take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. fied and meet the requirements of FCA Material
all parts and connections however, the Standard MS-12991.
pressures generated by these machines is
such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom- Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Oil Identification Symbol mended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For
Care should be taken in disposing of used
information on engine oil filler cap location,
This symbol means that the oil has engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Servicing
been certified by the American Petro- oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
And Maintenance” for further information.
leum Institute (API). The manufac- present a problem to the environment. Contact
turer only recommends API Certified Synthetic Engine Oils an authorized dealer, service station or govern-
engine oils. mental agency for advice on how and where
You may use synthetic engine oils, provided the used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, recommended oil quality requirements are met, your area.
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils. and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed. Engine Oil Filter
CAUTION!
Synthetic engine oils that do not have both the The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine new filter at every engine oil change.
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
oil as the chemicals can damage your
viscosity grade number should not be used. Engine Oil Filter Selection
engine. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow
Materials Added To Engine Oil
type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type
Engine Oil Viscosity — 1.4L Turbo Engine The manufacturer strongly recommends for replacement. The quality of replacement
(SAE Grade) against the addition of any additives (other than filters varies considerably. Only high quality
leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil filters should be used to ensure most efficient
Mopar SAE 5W-40 full synthetic engine oil is is an engineered product and its performance service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality
recommended for all operating temperatures. may be impaired by supplemental additives. oil filters and are recommended.
This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity
grade number should not be used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Air Conditioner Maintenance

CAUTION!
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section For best possible performance, your air condi-
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
for the proper maintenance intervals. tioner should be checked and serviced by an
conditioning system as the chemicals can
authorized dealer at the start of each warm
NOTE: damage your air conditioning components.
season. This service should include cleaning of
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions” Such damage is not covered by the New
the condenser fins and a performance test.
maintenance interval if applicable. Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
WARNING! Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
WARNING! R–1234yf
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in  Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri- R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove cants approved by the manufacturer for your hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, air conditioning system. Some unapproved Environmental Protection Agency and is an
etc.) unless such removal is necessary for refrigerants are flammable and can explode, ozone-friendly substance with a low
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants global-warming potential. The manufacturer
one is near the engine compartment before or lubricants can cause the system to fail, recommends that air conditioning service be
starting the vehicle with the air induction requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty performed by an authorized dealer using 7
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Information Book, located in your owner’s recovery and recycling equipment.
Failure to do so can result in serious information kit, for further warranty informa-
NOTE:
personal injury. tion.
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
 The air conditioning system contains refrig- compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
lines to be disconnected should be done by
filters should be used to ensure most efficient
an experienced technician.
service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters are a
high quality filter and are recommended.
Body Lubrication Windshield Wiper Blades  Wear or uneven edges

Locks and all body pivot points, including such Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and  Foreign material
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will  Hardening or cracking
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated remove accumulations of salt or road film.  Deformation or fatigue
periodically with a lithium based grease, such Operation of the wipers on dry glass, for long
as Mopar Spray White Lube, to ensure quiet If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged,
periods, may cause deterioration of the wiper replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a
easy operation, and to protect against rust and blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry wind- or blade that is damaged.
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to shield.
remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or Service Position Strategy
oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber The service position strategy allows the wiper
components to ensure proper function. When out of contact with petroleum products such as blades to be placed in a position that allows the
performing other underhood services, the hood engine oil, gasoline, etc. wiper blades to be easily changed.
latch release mechanism and safety catch NOTE: To enable the Service Position Strategy, the
should be cleaned and lubricated. Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending wipers must be in the Park position before
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor placing the ignition in the STOP/OFF position.
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and performance of blades may be present with chat-
Service mode must be activated within two
Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality tering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of
minutes after the ignition is placed in the STOP/
lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubri- these conditions are present, clean the wiper
OFF position.
cant, directly into the lock cylinder. blades or replace as necessary.
To have a correct activation of strategy, the
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be Service Position command (antipanic) must be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper active for at least half a second.
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points: At every valid activation of Service Position
command, the wiper blades are activated for
250 ms.
The Service Position command can be repeated

several times to bring the blades into the
desired position, up to a maximum of three
times.
After three subsequent activations the strategy
is disabled.
Function Deactivation:
The functionality is reset if:
 The ignition is turned to the MAR/RUN position Front Wiper Rear Wiper
1 — Wiper Blade 1 — Wiper Blade
 Number of subsequent activations is three
2 — Release Button 2 — Blade Pivot Pin
 Two minute timer has expired after turning the 3 — Wiper Arm 3 — Wiper Arm
ignition STOP (OFF/LOCK). 4 — Wiper Blade Holder
NOTE: 4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the
When turning the ignition MAR (ACC/ON/RUN), wiper blade until it snaps into place. 3. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the 7
the blades will go into the parking position. wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation arm, and firmly push the wiper blade until
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation it snaps into place.
1. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the
1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate glass.
Exhaust System
wiper blade off of the windshield.
2. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and The best protection against carbon monoxide
2. Push the release button on the arm of the rotate it forward to unsnap the blade pivot entry into the vehicle body is a properly main-
wiper blade. pin from the wiper blade holder. tained engine exhaust system.
3. Push the wiper blade up and remove it.
If you notice a change in the sound of the NOTE:

exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
CAUTION! Intentional tampering with emissions control
detected inside the vehicle; or when the under-  The catalytic converter requires the use of systems can result in civil penalties being
side or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will assessed against you.
authorized technician inspect the complete destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seri- In unusual situations involving grossly malfunc-
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
ously reduce engine performance and cause tioning engine operation, a scorching odor may
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or misposi-
serious damage to the engine. suggest severe and abnormal catalyst over-
tioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
heating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the  Damage to the catalytic converter can result the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
passenger compartment. In addition, have the if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifica-
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle condition. In the event of engine malfunction, tions, should be obtained immediately.
is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace particularly involving engine misfire or other
as required. apparent loss of performance, have your To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera- damage:
WARNING! tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction  Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis-
 Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain could cause the converter to overheat, sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and resulting in possible damage to the converter
and vehicle.  Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
towing the vehicle.
scious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety Tips” in Under normal operating conditions, the cata-  Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo-
“Safety” for further information. lytic converter will not require maintenance. nents disconnected or removed, such as when
However, it is important to keep the engine diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods
 A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst opera-
park over materials that can burn. Such during very rough idle or malfunctioning oper-
tion and prevent possible catalyst damage. ating conditions.
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do not
park or operate your vehicle in areas where
your exhaust system can contact anything
that can burn.
Cooling System and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti- NOTE:
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser
 Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
WARNING! for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
 You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in
garden hose vertically down the face of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from engine damage and may decrease corrosion
your radiator. If you see or hear steam condenser.
protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
coming from under the hood, do not open the engine coolant is different and should not be
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
hood until the radiator has had time to cool. mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
Never open a cooling system pressure cap NOTE: (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “glob-
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. Some vehicles require special tools to add ally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a
 Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is intro-
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood properly could lead to severe internal engine duced into the cooling system in an emergency,
is raised. The fan starts automatically and damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the cooling system will need to be drained,
may start at any time, whether the engine is the system please contact an authorized dealer. flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
running or not. (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or dealer as soon as possible.
 When working near the radiator cooling fan, contains visible sediment, have an authorized 7
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the igni- dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (anti-  Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
tion to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature freeze) (conforming to MS.90032). engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not
controlled and can start at any time the igni- use additional rust inhibitors or antirust prod-
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section ucts, as they may not be compatible with the
tion is in the ON mode.
for the proper maintenance intervals. radiator engine coolant and may plug the radi-
ator.
Coolant Checks Selection Of Coolant
 This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing Specifications” for further information.
freeze). Use of propylene glycolbased engine
weather, where applicable). If the engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appear-
ance, the system should be drained, flushed
 Some vehicles require special tools to add  Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine  Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems coolant that meets the requirements of FCA recommended and can result in cooling system
properly could lead to severe internal engine Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added water. Use higher concentrations (not to an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain,
to the system please contact an authorized exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to
dealer. (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an MS.90032) as soon as possible.
authorized dealer for assistance.
Adding Coolant Cooling System Pressure Cap
 Use only high purity water such as distilled or
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine deionized water when mixing the water/engine The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine quality water will reduce the amount of corro- that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or sion protection in the engine cooling system. the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. recovery tank if so equipped.
To prevent reducing this extended maintenance NOTE:
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
period, it is important that you use the same engine  It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the there is any accumulation of foreign material on
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) proper level of protection against freezing the sealing surfaces.
throughout the life of your vehicle. according to the temperatures occurring in the
Please review these recommendations for area where the vehicle is operated. WARNING!
using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine  Some vehicles require special tools to add  Do not open hot engine cooling system.
coolant (antifreeze) that meets the require- coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
ments of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. properly could lead to severe internal engine the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): damage. If any coolant is needed to be added remove the cap to cool an overheated
 We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/ to the system, please contact a local autho- engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) rized dealer. the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
that meets the requirements of FCA Material the system is hot or under pressure.
Standard MS.90032. (Continued)
As long as the engine operating temperature is  Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
WARNING! (Continued) satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
 Do not use a pressure cap other than the one checked once a month. coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or contents of the coolant expansion bottle must
When additional coolant (antifreeze) is needed
engine damage may result. also be protected against freezing.
to maintain the proper level, it should be added
to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.  If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) addi-
Disposal Of Used Coolant tions are required, the cooling system should
See an authorized dealer for service.
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) be pressure tested for leaks.
is a regulated substance requiring proper Points To Remember  Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concen-
disposal. Check with your local authorities to tration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant
NOTE:
determine the disposal rules for your commu- (conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
nity. To prevent ingestion by animals or chil- for proper corrosion protection of your engine
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
dren, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant which contains aluminum components.
coming from the front of the engine compart-
in open containers or allow it to remain in
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from  Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or
rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep
pet, seek emergency assistance immediately.
Clean up any ground spills immediately.
radiator and being vaporized when the thermo- the front of the condenser clean. 7
stat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.  Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Coolant Level Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces-
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick If an examination of your engine compartment sary, install ONLY the correct type of thermo-
visual method for determining that the coolant shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, stat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory
level is adequate. With the engine off and cold, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor
the level of the coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle soon dissipate. gas mileage, and increased emissions.
should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines  Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
marked on the bottle.
Brake System should be checked when pads are replaced.

However, low fluid level may be caused by a WARNING! (Continued)
In order to ensure brake system performance,
leak and a checkup may be needed.  Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
all brake system components should be
inspected periodically. Refer to the “Mainte- Use only manufacturer's recommended brake in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Tech- causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake
nance Plan” in this section for the proper main-
nical Specifications” for further information. fluid can also damage painted and vinyl
tenance intervals.
surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its
WARNING! WARNING! contact with these surfaces.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure  Use only manufacturer's recommended  Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
and possibly a collision. Driving with your brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can in “Technical Specifications” for further infor- components could be damaged, causing
result in abnormally high brake mation. Using the wrong type of brake fluid partial or complete brake failure. This could
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and can severely damage your brake system and/ result in a collision.
possible brake damage. You would not have or impair its performance. The proper type of
your full braking capacity in an emergency. brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified Automatic Transmission
on the original factory installed hydraulic
master cylinder reservoir. Selection Of Lubricant
Brake Master Cylinder
 To avoid contamination from foreign matter It is important to use the proper transmission
The fluid in the master cylinder should be or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid fluid to ensure optimum transmission perfor-
checked when performing under hood services that has been in a tightly closed container. mance and life. Use only the manufacturer's
or immediately if the “Brake Warning Light” is Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids
illuminated. secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder container absorbs moisture from the air for fluid specifications. It is important to main-
area before removing the cap. If necessary, add resulting in a lower boiling point. This may tain the transmission fluid at the correct level
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the require- cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or using the recommended fluid.
ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to failure. This could result in a collision.
fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level (Continued)
NOTE: Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engi- leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an
No chemical flushes should be used in any neered product and its performance may be authorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission; only the approved lubricant impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, transmission fluid level checked. Operating
should be used. do not add any fluid additives to the transmis- the vehicle with an improper fluid level can
sion. The only exception to this policy is the use cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION! of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid
using transmission sealers as they may CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
adversely affect seals. If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may
cause deterioration in transmission shift authorized dealer immediately. Severe
CAUTION! transmission damage may occur. An
quality and/or torque converter shudder.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in Do not use chemical flushes in your authorized dealer has the proper tools to
“Technical Specifications” for fluid transmission as the chemicals can damage adjust the fluid level accurately.
specifications. your transmission components. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Fluid And Filter Changes
Special Additives Limited Warranty. Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
The manufacturer strongly recommends installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
Fluid Level Check 7
against using any special additives in the lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
transmission. The fluid level is preset at the factory and Routine fluid and filter changes are not
does not require adjustment under normal required. However, change the fluid and filter if
operating conditions. Routine fluid level the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
checks are not required; therefore the trans- etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
mission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer any reason.
can check your transmission fluid level using
special service tools. If you notice fluid
RAISING THE VEHICLE Tire Markings NOTE:

 P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based
In the case where it is necessary to raise the
on US design standards. P-Metric tires have
vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service
the letter “P” molded into the sidewall
station.
preceding the size designation. Example:
TIRES P215/65R15 95H.
 European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
Tire Safety Information
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the standard have the tire size molded into the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identi- sidewall beginning with the section width. The
fication Numbers, Tire Terminology and Defini- Tire Markings letter "P" is absent from this tire size designa-
tions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading. tion. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation  LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for
3 — Service Description LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
4 — Maximum Load except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
5 — Maximum Pressure the sidewall preceding the size designation.
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Example: LT235/85R16.
Grades
 Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-  High flotation tire sizing is based on US design Tire Identification Number (TIN)
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres- standards and it begins with the tire diameter
The Tire Identification Number (TIN) may be
sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5
found on one or both sides of the tire; however,
“S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size R15 LT.
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN,
including the date code, located on the white
sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the
outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found
on the outboard side, then you will find it on the
inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
 This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
7
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 01 means the year 2001
 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031
could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for
a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation
pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity,
the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended pres-
sure for your vehicle. Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard Loading Steps For Determining Correct Load
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not Limit—
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on (1) Locate the statement “The combined
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load weight of occupants and cargo should
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pres-
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
sures specified on the Tire and Loading Infor- vehicle's placard.
mation placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the (2) Determine the combined weight of
“Starting And Operating” section of this manual. the driver and passengers that will be
NOTE: riding in your vehicle.
Tire And Loading Information Placard Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
This placard tells you important information gross axle weight ratings (GAWR) for the front and
rear axles must not be exceeded.
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
about the:
XXX lbs.
1. Number of people that can be carried in For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading,
and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in (4) The resulting figure equals the avail-
the vehicle 7
the “Starting And Operating” section of this able amount of cargo and luggage load
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry manual. capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle To determine the maximum loading conditions
equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, amount of available cargo and luggage
combined weight of occupants and cargo
rear, and spare tires
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
Tire and Loading Information placard. The (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight referenced here.
(5) Determine the combined weight of Metric Example For Load Limit NOTE:
luggage and cargo being loaded on the For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg  If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
vehicle. That weight may not safely and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
exceed the available cargo and luggage vehicle, the amount of available cargo and The following table shows examples on how to
load capacity calculated in Step 4. luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340 calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4. capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, configurations and number and size of occu-
load from your trailer will be transferred pants. This table is for illustration purposes
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to only and may not be accurate for the seating
determine how this reduces the avail- and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
able cargo and luggage load capacity of  For the following example, the combined
your vehicle. weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
7
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the

WARNING! stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. WARNING! of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect  Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and the steering.
vehicle handling, and increase your stopping can cause collisions. NOTE:
distance. Use tires of the recommended
 Underinflation increases tire flexing and can
load capacity for your vehicle. Never  Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
result in overheating and tire failure.
overload them. cause erratic and unpredictable steering
 Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to response.
Tires — General Information cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result in  Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
tire failure. cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the  Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect Fuel Economy
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire resulting in loss of vehicle control. resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
pressure:  Unequal tire pressures can cause steering Tread Wear
 Safety problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle. Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
 Fuel Economy abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
 Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
 Tread Wear vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to
ment.
drift to the right or left.
 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
 Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfort-
able ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, main-
maximum inflation pressure molded into the taining correct tire inflation pressure is very
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
tire sidewall. important. Increased tire pressure and reduced
on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a vehicle loading may be required for high-speed
driver's side door.
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire
At least once a month: dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for
pressures vary with temperature changes.
 Check and adjust tire pressure with a good recommended safe operating speeds, loading
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi and cold tire inflation pressures.
make a visual judgement when determining (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
proper inflation. Tires may look properly change. Keep this in mind when checking tire WARNING!
inflated even when they are under-inflated. pressure inside a garage, especially in the
High speed driving with your vehicle under
Winter.
 Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible maximum load is dangerous. The added
damage. Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then You could have a serious collision. Do not
the cold tire inflation pressure should be drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
CAUTION!
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi capacity at continuous speeds above
After inspecting or adjusting the tire (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside 75 mph (120 km/h). 7
pressure, always reinstall the valve stem temperature condition.
cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from Radial Ply Tires
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13
entering the valve stem, which could
to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this
damage the valve stem.
normal pressure build up or your tire pressure WARNING!
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are will be too low.
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure to handle poorly. The instability could cause
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least The manufacturer advocates driving at safe a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) speeds and within posted speed limits. Where of four. Never combine them with other types
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The speed limits or conditions are such that the of tires.
Tire Repair Run Flat Tires — If Equipped Tire Spinning

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice condi-
repaired if it meets the following criteria: 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a tions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above
 The tire has not been driven on when flat. rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. seconds continuously without stopping.
 The damage is only on the tread section of your A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
tire (sidewall damage is not repairable). Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Emergency” for further information.
 The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has
(6 mm). limited driving capabilities and needs to be WARNING!
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
repairable. When a Run Flat tire is changed
and additional information. generated by excessive wheel speeds may
after driving with underinflated tire condition,
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that please replace the TPM sensor as it is not
explode and injure someone. Do not spin
have experienced a loss of pressure, should be designed to be reused when driven under Run
your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
of identical size and service description (Load
NOTE: continuously when you are stuck, and do not
Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pres-
The TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
sure sensor as well as it is not designed to be
the vehicle on a flat tire condition. what the speed.
reused.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
Tread Wear Indicators Life Of Tire NOTE:

Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when
Tread wear indicators are in the original equip- The service life of a tire is dependent upon
installing new tires due to wear and tear in
ment tires to help you in determining when your varying factors including, but not limited to:
existing tires.
tires should be replaced.  Driving style
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
 Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres- as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in Replacement Tires
the need for earlier tire replacement
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
 Distance driven of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
 Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
Tire Tread lent to the originals in size, quality and perfor-
the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
1 — Worn Tire mance when replacement is needed. Refer to
2 — New Tire
recommended 7
the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in
this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading Infor-
WARNING!
These indicators are molded into the bottom of mation placard or the Vehicle Certification Label
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced for the size designation of your tire. The Load
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
after six years, regardless of the remaining Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
tread. Failure to follow this warning can found on the original equipment tire sidewall.
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
result in sudden tire failure. You could lose
tread wear indicators, the tire should be See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the
control and have a collision resulting in
replaced. “Tire Safety Information” section of this manual
serious injury or death.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for for more information relating to the Load Index
further information. and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire WARNING! (Continued) and handling of your vehicle.
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If  Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the capacity, other than what was originally Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
wheel’s specifications match those of the orig- equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a Equipped
inal wheels. smaller load index could result in tire over- Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
loading and failure. You could lose control dry conditions, and are not intended to be
It is recommended you contact an authorized
and have a collision. driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or  Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
capability. Failure to use equivalent replace- adequate speed capability can result in tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
ment tires may adversely affect the safety, sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
handling, and ride of your vehicle. when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
WARNING! CAUTION! For more information, contact an authorized
 Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or Replacing original tires with tires of a dealer.
speed rating other than that specified for different size may result in false Summer tires do not contain the all season
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap- speedometer and odometer readings. designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
proved tires and wheels may change suspen- the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
sion dimensions and performance Tire Types
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
characteristics, resulting in changes to safety and handling of your vehicle.
steering, handling, and braking of your All Season Tires — If Equipped
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable All Season tires provide traction for all seasons WARNING!
handling and stress to steering and suspen- (Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
sion components. You could lose control and levels may vary between different all season conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
have a collision resulting in serious injury or tires. All season tires can be identified by the resulting in severe injury or death. Driving
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
load ratings approved for your vehicle. too fast for conditions also creates the
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; possibility of loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
Snow Tires Spare Tires — If Equipped may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an autho-
Some areas of the country require the use of NOTE: rized tire dealer for the recommended tire rota-
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be For vehicles equipped with a Tire Service Kit tion pattern.
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
on the tire sidewall. Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
If you need snow tires, select tires information.
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
equivalent in size and type to the orig- use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
inal equipment tires. Use snow tires CAUTION!
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
only in sets of four; failure to do so Because of the reduced ground clearance, the spare tire description on the Tire and
may adversely affect the safety and handling of do not take your vehicle through an Loading Information Placard located on the
your vehicle. automatic car wash with a compact or driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings limited use temporary spare installed. the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
than what was originally equipped with your Damage to the vehicle may result. with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
vehicle and should not be operated at designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For Refer to “Towing Requirements - Tires” in
“Starting And Operating” for restrictions when T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to orig- 7
inal equipment or an authorized tire dealer for towing with a spare tire designated for tempo- Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
recommended safe operating speeds, loading rary emergency use. equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and cold tire inflation pressures. and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire opportunity.
While studded tires improve performance on And Wheel — If Equipped
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
surfaces may be poorer than that of Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit and wheel equivalent in look and function to the since the wheel is designed specifically for the
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be original equipment tire and wheel found on the compact spare tire. Do not install more than
checked before using these tire types. front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original Full Size Spare — If Equipped
WARNING! equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
Compact and collapsible spares are for and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
use only. This tire may look like the originally
temporary emergency use only. With these opportunity.
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to collapsible tire using the electric air pump tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use before lowering the vehicle. size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount not the same as your original equipment tire,
follow the warnings, which apply to your
a conventional tire on the collapsible spare replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportu-
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
for the collapsible spare tire. nity.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped WARNING! Limited Use Spare — If Equipped

The collapsible spare is for temporary emer- Compact and Collapsible spares are for The limited use spare tire is for temporary
gency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is temporary emergency use only. With these emergency use only. This tire is identified by
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at spares, do not drive more than 50 mph a label located on the limited use spare
the spare tire description on the Tire and (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have wheel. This label contains the driving limita-
Loading Information Placard located on the limited tread life. When the tread is worn to tions for this spare. This tire may look like the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tread wear indicators, the temporary use original equipped tire on the front or rear axle
the tire. spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this
Collapsible spare tire description example: follow the warnings, which apply to your limited use spare tire affects vehicle
165/80-17 101P. spare. Failure to do so could result in spare handling. Since it is not the same as your orig-
tire failure and loss of vehicle control. inal equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
WARNING! caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recom-
Limited use spares are for emergency use chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road mended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
not drive more than the speed listed on the soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh CAUTION!
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner.
Tire and Loading Information Placard from corroding and tarnishing. These products may damage the wheel's
located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the protective finish. Such damage is not
rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace CAUTION! covered by the New Vehicle Limited
(or repair) the original equipment tire at the Avoid products or automatic car washes that Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel
first opportunity and reinstall it on your use acidic solutions or strong alkaline Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss additives or harsh brushes. Many
of vehicle control. aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic NOTE:
car washes may damage the wheel's If you intend on parking or storing your vehicle for
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care protective finish. Such damage is not an extended period after cleaning the wheels 7
covered by the New Vehicle Limited with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum the brakes to remove the water droplets from the
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned brake components. This activity will remove the
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
to maintain their luster and to prevent corro- When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including vibration when braking.
sion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
recommended for the body of the vehicle and selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
remember to always wash when the surfaces and equipment to prevent damage to the
are not hot to the touch.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or

Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued)
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,  Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
CAUTION! Snow) between front and rear axles can pavement.
If your vehicle is equipped with these cause unpredictable handling. You could
 Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel lose control and have a collision. instructions on the method of installation,
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing operating speed, and conditions for use.
compounds. They will permanently damage Always use the suggested operating speed of
this finish and such damage is not covered CAUTION!
the device manufacturer’s if it is less than
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, 30 mph (48 km/h).
WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND WATER observe the following precautions:
 Do not use traction devices on a compact
WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
 Because of restricted traction device clear- spare tire.
basis; this is all that is required to maintain
ance between tires and other suspension
this finish. components, it is important that only traction Tire Rotation Recommendations
devices in good condition are used. Broken The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
Tire Chains and Traction Devices
devices can cause serious damage. Stop the operate at different loads and perform different
Use of traction devices require sufficient vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could steering, driving, and braking functions. For
tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommen- indicate device breakage. Remove the these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
dations to guard against damage. damaged parts of the device before further
use. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
 Traction device must be of proper size for the
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
tire, as recommended by the traction device  Install device as tightly as possible and then worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
manufacturer. retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). as those on all season type tires. Rotation will
 Install on front tires only.  Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
 Due to limited clearance, on a 205/55 R16, 
large bumps, especially with a loaded smooth, quiet ride.
use reduced size snow chains or traction
devices with a maximum projection of 9 mm vehicle.
beyond the tire profile. (Continued)
Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” in this

section for the proper maintenance intervals.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to varia-
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES tions in driving habits, service practices,
should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed. The following tire grading categories and differences in road characteristics
were established by the National and climate.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This Highway Traffic Safety Administration. Traction Grades
rotation pattern does not apply to some direc- The specific grade rating assigned by the The Traction grades, from highest to
tional tires that must not be reversed. tire's manufacturer in each category is lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
shown on the sidewall of the tires on represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
your vehicle. pavement, as measured under
All passenger vehicle tires must conform controlled conditions on specified
to Federal safety requirements in addi- government test surfaces of asphalt and
tion to these grades. concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
Treadwear traction performance.
7
The Treadwear grade is a comparative WARNING!
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire The traction grade assigned to this tire is
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross) when tested under controlled conditions based on straight-ahead braking traction
on a specified government test course. tests, and does not include acceleration,
For example, a tire graded 150 would cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
wear one and one-half times as well on characteristics.
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
Temperature Grades  Disconnect the negative (-) connector from the

WARNING! battery post and be sure that the battery is fully
The Temperature grades are A (the charged , press button to detach connector
The temperature grade for this tire is
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's established for a tire that is properly inflated from negative (-) post.
resistance to the generation of heat and and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
 Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under-inflation, or excessive loading, either
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
under controlled conditions on a speci- separately or in combination, can cause
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
fied indoor laboratory test wheel. heat buildup and possible tire failure.
five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
Sustained high temperature can cause setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
the material of the tire to degenerate VEHICLE STORAGE cation to minimize the possibility of
compressor damage when the system is
and reduce tire life, and excessive If you will not be using your vehicle for more started again.
temperature can lead to sudden tire than 21 days, you may want to take the
NOTE:
failure. The grade C corresponds to a following steps to preserve your battery.
When the vehicle has not been started or driven
level of performance, which all for at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start
passenger vehicle tires must meet Procedure is required to start the vehicle. Refer
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety to “Starting The Engine” in “Starting And Oper-
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre- ating” for further information.
sent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
Negative (-) Battery Cable

1 — Release Button
2 — Negative (-) Cable Connector
3 — Negative (-) Post
BODYWORK The most common causes are: Preserving The Bodywork

 Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
Protection From Atmospheric Agents Washing
 Stone and gravel impact
Vehicle body care requirements vary according  Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals  Insects, tree sap and tar vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or
that make roads passable in snow and ice and a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
 Salt in the air near seacoast localities
those that are sprayed on trees and road completely with clear water.
surfaces during other seasons are highly corro-  Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
 If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
sive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super
Body And Underbody Maintenance
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
contaminants, road surfaces on which the Cleaning Headlights
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather  Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar
and other extreme conditions will have an Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under- and fog lights that are lighter and less suscep- protect your paint finish. Take care never to
body protection. tible to stone breakage than glass headlights. scratch the paint.
The following maintenance recommendations Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and  Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
therefore different lens cleaning procedures buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
7
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle. must be followed. the paint finish.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
What Causes Corrosion? lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping CAUTION!
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with  Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
removal of paint and protective coatings from a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. rials such as steel wool or scouring powder
your vehicle. Do not use abrasive cleaning components, that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive mate-  Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
rial to clean the lenses. (8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
of paint and decals.
Special Care  If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, Seat Belt Maintenance
consider mud or stone shields behind each
 If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chem-
wheel.
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar- ical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
riage at least once a month.  Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has weaken the fabric.
 It is important that the drain holes in the lower
touch up paint to match the color of your
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solu-
vehicle.
kept clear and open. tion or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts
 If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the INTERIORS from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
cloth.
paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of
Seats And Fabric Parts Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner. Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric uphol- or if the buckles do not work properly.
stery and carpeting.
 If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or WARNING!
similar cause that destroys the paint and WARNING! A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning collision and leave you with no protection.
as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is
purposes. Many are potentially flammable, Inspect the belt system periodically,
considered the responsibility of the owner.
and if used in closed areas they may cause checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
 If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, respiratory harm. Damaged parts must be replaced
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such immediately. Do not disassemble or
materials are well packaged and sealed. modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts Leather Parts

CAUTION!
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/
for leather upholstery.
CAUTION! or Ketone based cleaning products to clean
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved leather upholstery, as damage to the
 Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel- by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. upholstery may result.
lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of and damage the leather upholstery and should Glass Surfaces
the interior may cause permanent damage. be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stub-
Wipe away immediately. All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
born soils can be removed easily with a soft
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
 Damage caused by these type of products cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be
commercial household-type glass cleaner.
may not be covered by your New Vehicle taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
Limited Warranty. with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils,
when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
with electric defrosters or windows equipped
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner
The lenses in front of the instruments in this other sharp instruments that may scratch the
is not required to maintain the original condi-
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When elements. 7
tion.
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
avoid scratching the plastic. NOTE: cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
solution may be used, but do not use high
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If
is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom-
soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
mends Mopar Total Clean leather cleaner applied
cloth.
on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
206
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA BRAKE SYSTEM WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Vehicle Identification Number Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found
systems loses normal capability, the remaining the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
on the left front corner of the instrument panel,
system will still function. However, there will be and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
visible through the windshield.
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
may notice increased pedal travel during appli- brated torque wrench using a high quality six
cation, greater pedal force required to slow or sided (hex) deep wall socket.
stop, and potential activation of the Brake
Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason
(i.e., repeated brake applications with the
engine off) the brakes will still function.
However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required
Vehicle Identification Number with the power system operating.
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 207
Torque Specifications After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
Lug Nut/Bolt **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/Bolt properly seated against the wheel.
Torque Bolt Size Socket Size
63 Ft-Lbs M12 x 1.25 17 mm WARNING!
(86 N·m) To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
Steel Wheels jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully
Only until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
89 Ft-Lbs follow this warning may result in personal
(120 N·m) Wheel Mounting Surface injury.
Aluminum
Wheels Only Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure FUEL REQUIREMENTS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/
lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or bolt (do not insert it halfway). 1.4L Turbo
oil before tightening. This engine is designed to meet all
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to emission regulations, provide satis-
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or factory fuel economy and perfor-
loose particles. mance when using high-quality
unleaded “Regular” gasoline having a posted 8
octane number of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. For optimum performance and fuel
economy the use of “Premium” 91 octane gaso-
line or higher is recommended.
Torque Patterns
208 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
While operating on gasoline with an octane Materials Added To Fuel Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain with oxygenates such as ethanol.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
knocking sound, see an authorized dealer CAUTION!
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane
additives will help improve fuel economy, DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing
number lower than 87 can cause engine failure
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor- methanol, or gasoline containing more than
and may void or not be covered by the New
mance. 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso- may result in starting and drivability
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such problems, damage critical fuel system
line contains a higher level of deter-
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you components, cause emissions to exceed the
gents to further aide in minimizing
experience these symptoms, try another brand applicable standard, and/or cause the
engine and fuel system deposits.
of gasoline before considering service for the Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate.
When available, the usage of TOP TIER Deter-
vehicle. Please observe pump labels as they should
gent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
Reformulated Gasoline www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Deter- clearly communicate if a fuel contains
gent Gasoline Retailers. greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Refor- Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning Problems that result from using gasoline
mulated Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline agents should be avoided. Many of these mate- containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
contains oxygenates and are specifically rials intended for gum and varnish removal may gasoline containing methanol are not the
blended to reduce vehicle emissions and contain active solvents or similar ingredients. responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
improve air quality. These can harm fuel system gasket and or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
The use of reformulated gasoline is recom- diaphragm materials. Warranty.
mended. Properly blended reformulated
gasoline will provide improved performance
and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications MMT In Gasoline
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible Modifications that allow the engine to run on Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic addi-
(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol Propane (LP) may result in damage to the tive that is blended into some gasoline to
content may void the New Vehicle Limited engine, emissions, and fuel system compo- increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
Warranty. nents. Problems that result from running CNG provides no performance advantage beyond
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with or LP are not the responsibility of the manufac- gasoline of the same octane number without
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of turer and may void or not be covered under the MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
these symptoms: New Vehicle Limited Warranty. spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The manufac-
 Operate in a lean mode
turer recommends that gasoline without MMT
 OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline
 Poor engine performance pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline
 Poor cold start and cold drivability retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
 Increased risk for fuel system component reformulated gasoline.
corrosion
8
Fuel System Cautions Carbon Monoxide Warnings

CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!  The use of fuel additives, which are now WARNING!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your being sold as octane enhancers, is not Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
recommended. Most of these products
vehicle’s performance: deadly. Follow the precautions below to
contain high concentrations of methanol.
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
 Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can problems resulting from the use of such fuels  Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
impair engine performance and damage the or additives is not the responsibility of the carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
emissions control system. manufacturer and may void or not be covered gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a
 An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni- under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. closed area, such as a garage, and never sit
tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic in a parked vehicle with the engine running
NOTE: for an extended period. If the vehicle is
converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent
Intentional tampering with the emissions control stopped in an open area with the engine
burning odor or some light smoke, your
system can result in civil penalties being running for more than a short period, adjust
engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning
assessed against you. the ventilation system to force fresh, outside
and may require immediate service. Contact
an authorized dealer for service assistance. air into the vehicle.
(Continued)  Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
Have any abnormal conditions repaired
promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 12.7 Gallons 48.1 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
1.4L Turbo Engine 4 Quarts 3.8 Liters
Cooling System
1.4L Turbo Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/ 6.1 Quarts 5.8 Liters
150,000 Mile Formula).
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-90032. 8
Engine Oil – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use SAE 5W-40 API Certified Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12991. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct
SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 1.4L Turbo Engine 91 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued)

 Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other  Do not use water alone or alcohol-based  This vehicle has not been designed for use
than specified Organic Additive Technology engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result use additional rust inhibitors or antirust prod- (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
in engine damage and may decrease corro- ucts, as they may not be compatible with the engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
sion protection. Organic Additive Technology radiator engine coolant and may plug the mended.
(OAT) engine coolant is different and should radiator.
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive (Continued)
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant
(antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system
will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
(Continued)
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Automatic Transmission Use only Mopar AW-1 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance
of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 4. If DOT 4 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 3 is acceptable.
If using DOT 4 brake fluid, the fluid must be changed every 24 months.
This interval is time based only, mileage intervals do not apply.
8
214
MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
NOTE:
 FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and most recent version of vehicle software (such as
directly regarding software updates.
may be equipped with both wired and wireless Uconnect software) is installed.
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to  To help further improve vehicle security and
send and receive information. This information WARNING! minimize the potential risk of a security breach,
allows systems and features in your vehicle to  It is not possible to know or to predict all of vehicle owners should:
function properly. the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
 Routinely check www.driveucon-
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain secu- systems are breached. It may be possible
nect.com/support/soft-
rity features to reduce the risk of unauthorized that vehicle systems, including safety related
ware-update.html (U.S. Residents) or
and unlawful access to vehicle systems and systems, could be impaired or a loss of
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Resi-
wireless communications. Vehicle software vehicle control could occur that may result in
dents) to learn about available Uconnect
technology continues to evolve over time and an accident involving serious injury or death.
software updates.
FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evalu-  ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD)
ates and takes appropriate steps as needed. into your vehicle if it came from a trusted  Only connect and use trusted media
Similar to a computer or other devices, your source. Media of unknown origin could devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
vehicle may require software updates to possibly contain malicious software, and if USBs, CDs).
improve the usability and performance of your installed in your vehicle, it may increase the Privacy of any wireless and wired communica-
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unau- possibility for vehicle systems to be tions cannot be assured. Third parties may
thorized and unlawful access to your vehicle breached. unlawfully intercept information and private
systems.  As always, if you experience unusual vehicle communications without your consent. For
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest further information, refer to “Onboard Diag-
authorized dealer immediately. nostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
MULTIMEDIA 215
UCONNECT SETTINGS NOTE: When making a selection, press the button on

the touchscreen to enter the desired mode.
 Only one touchscreen area may be selected at
Uconnect 4/4 NAV Settings Once in the desired mode, press and release
a time.
the preferred setting until a check-mark
Push the Settings button to display the menu
 Depending on the vehicles options, feature appears next to the setting, showing that setting
setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect
settings may vary. has been selected. Once the setting is
system allows you to access programmable
complete, either press the back arrow button on
features that may be equipped such as
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu,
Language, Display, Units, Voice, Clock & Date,
or press the X button on the touchscreen to
Safety/ Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors &
close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up
Locks, Engine Off Options, Phone, SiriusXM®
or Down Arrow button on the right side of the
Setup, Restore Settings to Default and Clear
screen will allow you to toggle up or down
Personal Data.
through the available settings.
9
216 MULTIMEDIA
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options

Language English Français Español
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Display Mode Auto Manual
NOTE:
When Day or Night is selected for the Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day
control even though the headlights are on.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON + –
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF + –
Units US Metric
AutoShow Smartphone Display Upon
Connection — If Equipped
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Display Trip B On Off
MULTIMEDIA 217
Units
 Units
When in this display, you may select to have the instrument cluster display, odometer, and navigation system changed between US and Metric units of
measure. Press “US,” “Metric” or “Custom.”
 Custom
When “Custom” is selected, you may select each unit of measure independently displayed in the instrument cluster display, and navigation system.

US Distance Fuel Consumption Pressure Temperature
Metric Distance Fuel Consumption Pressure Temperature
Custom Distance Fuel Consumption Pressure Temperature
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Never With Help Always
9
218 MULTIMEDIA
Clock & Date

After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Sync Time With GPS On Off
NOTE:
This feature allows you to automatically have the radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press the Sync Time With GPS button on the touch-
screen.
Set Time Hours + –
NOTE:
This feature allows you to adjust the hours. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Set Time Minutes + –
NOTE:
This feature allows you to adjust the minutes. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Time Format 12 hrs 24 hrs
AM PM
Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
This feature allows you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar.
Set Date (MM/DD/YY) - +
NOTE:
This feature allows you to set the date, month, and year using the plus and minus buttons.
MULTIMEDIA 219
Safety & Driving Assistance

After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

ParkView Backup Camera Active On Off
Guide Lines
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate
the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen displays the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to
10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R). This delay is canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is
shifted into PARK (P), or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Park Assist— If Equipped OFF Sound Only Sound & Display
NOTE:
The “Park Assist” system setting scans for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less
than 7 mph (11 km/h), when enabled. It provides an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled
with “OFF,” Sound Only,” or “Sound & Display.” 9
Rear Park Assist Volume— If Low Medium High
Equipped
220 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Interior Ambient Lights + –
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the brightness of the interior ambient lighting.
Greeting Lights - +
Daytime Running Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only available if allowed by law
in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Cornering Lights On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn
on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
Doors & Locks

After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
MULTIMEDIA 221
Engine Off Options

After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Radio Off Delay 0 MIN 20 MIN
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Balance/Fade Speaker Icon Arrow Buttons
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings.
Equalizer + –
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.
Speed Adjust Volume — If Off 1 2 3
Equipped
Surround Sound — If On Off
9
Equipped
222 MULTIMEDIA

Loudness — If Equipped On Off
AUX Volume Offset — If On Off
Equipped
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Auto Play On Off
NOTE:
USB devices will automatically play media when AutoPlay is turned On.
Auto-On Radio On Off Recall Last
NOTE:
The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition off.
MULTIMEDIA 223
Phone/Bluetooth®
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be
used only in safe driving conditions following
all applicable laws. Your attention should be
focused on safely operating the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Options
NOTE:
The “Do Not Disturb” feature allows the paired phone to send a predetermined call, text or both, to any incoming call, or text, before sending it directly to
voicemail. It also allows a choice between a Default or Custom auto reply message. In the Customize Auto Reply Message, a customized message can be
typed. It also keeps a counter of all missed calls and texts while on the road.
Paired Phones and Audio Devices Paired Phones and Audio Devices
9
224 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped

After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Tune Start On Off
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the twelve presets, so you
can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you
will not even realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip Channel Skip
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning.
To make your selection, press the Channel Skip button on the touchscreen, and select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Information Subscription Info
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the
free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider
online.
MULTIMEDIA 225
Restore Settings To Default

After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Restore Settings Yes No
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will reset Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default.
Clear Personal Data

After pressing the Clear Personal Data Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Clear Personal Data Yes No
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will remove personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
9
226 MULTIMEDIA
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION  Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.

Failure to do so may cause injury or damage to
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed depen-
Safety Guidelines the product. Return it to an authorized dealer dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to use
for repair. some of the touchscreen features while the
WARNING! vehicle is in motion.
 Ensure the volume level of the system is set to
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the a level that still allows you to hear outside Exposure To Radio Frequency Radiation
steering wheel. You have full responsibility traffic and emergency vehicles.
The internal wireless radio operates within
and assume all risks related to the use of
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System guidelines found in radio frequency safety stan-
the Uconnect features and applications in
dards and recommendations, which reflect the
this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is  Read all instructions in this manual carefully consensus of the scientific community. The
safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in before using your system to ensure proper radio manufacturer believes the internal wire-
an accident involving serious injury or death. usage. less radio is safe for use by consumers. The
 The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec- level of energy emitted is far less than the elec-
Ensure that all persons read this manual care- tromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices
tronic device. Do not let young children use the
fully before using the system. It contains such as mobile phones. However, the use of
system.
instructions on how to use the system in a safe wireless radios may be restricted in some situa-
and effective manner.  Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play tions or environments, such as aboard
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen. your music or the system at loud volumes. Exer- airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
Doing so can result in damage to the touch- cise caution when setting the volume on the are encouraged to ask for authorization before
system. turning on the wireless radio.
screen.
Please read and follow these safety precau-  Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-
ture away from the system. Besides damage to Care And Maintenance
tions. Failure to do so may result in injury or
property damage. the system, moisture can cause electric shocks Touchscreen
as with any electronic device.  Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or
 Glance at the screen only when safe to do so. If
prolonged viewing of the screen is required, sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.),
park in a safe location and set the parking which could scratch the touchscreen surface!
brake.
MULTIMEDIA 227
 Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals NOTE: 4. Uconnect

directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry Uconnect screen images are for illustration Press the Uconnect button on the touch-
microfiber lens cleaning cloth in order to clean purposes only and may not reflect exact software screen to access applications for your
the touchscreen. for your vehicle. Uconnect System.
 If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened 1. Radio 5. Nav
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl Press the Radio button on the touchscreen
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solu- to enter Radio Mode. The different tuner Press the Nav button on the touchscreen
tion ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent modes; AM, FM, and SXM can be selected to set a navigation route and/or alter the
manufacturer's precautions and directions. by pressing the corresponding buttons on navigation settings.
the touchscreens in Radio Mode.
UCONNECT 4/4 NAV WITH 7-INCH 6. Settings
2. Media Press the Settings button on the touch-
DISPLAY Press the Media button on the touchscreen to access the Uconnect Settings
Introduction screen to access media sources such as: menu.
USB Device, AUX, and Bluetooth® as long 7. Trip
as the requested media is present.
Press the Trip button on the display to view
3. Phone the car’s trip information. This function is
Press the Phone button on the touch- composed of the “Instant info” items
screen to access the Uconnect Phone fea- (“Range” and “Current fuel consumption”)
ture. and the two separate trips called “Trip A”
and “Trip B” for monitoring the vehicle’s 9
“complete journey” in a reciprocally inde-
pendent manner.
Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-Inch Display
228 MULTIMEDIA
Drag & Drop Menu Bar Radio Mode Volume/Power Control

The Uconnect features and services in the main Push the Volume/Power control knob to turn off
Radio Controls
menu bar are easily changed for your conve- the screen and mute the radio. Push the
nience. Simply follow these steps: Volume/Power control knob a second time to
turn the screen back on and unmute the radio.
The electronic volume control turns continu-
ously (360 degrees) in either direction, without
stopping. Turning the Volume/Power control
knob clockwise increases the volume, and
counterclockwise decreases it.
Tune/Scroll Control
Radio Operation When the audio system is turned on, the sound
will be set at the same volume level as last
Uconnect 4/4 NAV Main Menu The radio is equipped with the following modes: played.
 AM
1. Press the Uconnect button to open the Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clock-
App screen.  FM wise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App  SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped) Enter/Browse button to choose a selection.
to replace an existing shortcut in the main Press the Radio button on the touchscreen, Screen Close
menu bar. bottom left corner, to enter the Radio Mode. The
The X button on the touchscreen at the top right,
The new App shortcut, that was dragged different tuner modes; AM, FM, and SXM, can
provides a means to close the Direct Tune
down onto the main menu bar, will now be then be selected by pressing the corresponding
Screen. The Direct Tune Screen also auto
an active App/shortcut. buttons in the Radio mode.
closes if no activity occurs within a few seconds.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK (P).
MULTIMEDIA 229
Seek And Direct Tune Functions station after passing through the entire band Undo
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated two times, the radio will stop at the station You can backspace an entry by pressing the
by pressing the double arrow buttons on the where it began.
bottom left on the touchscreen.
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio Fast Seek Down
OK
station display, or by pressing the left “Steering
Press and hold the Seek Down button on the Once the last digit of a station has been
Wheel Audio Control” (if equipped) up or down.
touchscreen to advance the radio through the entered, press the OK button and the Direct
Seek Up available stations or channel at a faster rate, Tune screen will close and the system will auto-
the radio stops at the next available station or matically tune to that station.
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
channel when the button on the touchscreen is
touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listen- The selected Station or Channel number is
released.
able station or channel. During a Seek Up func- displayed in the Direct Tune text box.
tion, if the radio reaches the starting station Direct Tune
after passing through the entire band two times, Press the Tune button on the touchscreen Setting The Presets
the radio will stop at the station where it began. located at the bottom of the radio screen. The The Presets are available for all Radio Modes,
Fast Seek Up Direct Tune button on the touchscreen is avail- and are activated by pressing any of the six
able in AM, FM, and SXM. Radio modes can be Preset buttons on the touchscreen, located at
Press and hold the Seek Up button on the used to direct tune the radio to a desired station the top of the screen.
touchscreen to advance the radio through the or channel.
available stations or channels at a faster rate, When you are receiving a station that you wish
the radio stops at the next available station or Press the available number button on the to commit into memory, press and hold the
channel when the button on the touchscreen is touchscreen to begin selecting a desired desired numbered button on the touchscreen
station. Once a number has been entered, any for more than two seconds or until you hear a
9
released.
numbers that are no longer possible (stations confirmation beep.
Seek Down that cannot be reached) will become deacti-
vated/grayed out. The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Press and release the Seek Down button on Radio modes. A set of six presets are visible at
the touchscreen to tune the radio to the next the top of the radio screen.
listenable station or channel. During a Seek
Down function, if the radio reaches the starting
230 MULTIMEDIA
You can switch between the two radio presets Deleting Presets  On the go — With a SiriusXM® Internet Radio
by pressing the arrow button located in the A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse subscription included with the All Access trial,
upper right of the radio touchscreen. you’ll get SiriusXM® on your computer, smart-
screen by pressing the trash can icon for the
phone, or tablet. Including:
Browse In AM/FM corresponding Preset.
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen Return To Main Radio Screen  A huge On Demand catalog
provides a means to edit the Presets List and is You can return to the Main Radio Screen, by  Xtra Channels featuring SiriusXM®
entered by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE pressing the X button on the touchscreen when Latino – a collection of
button. in the Browse Presets screen. Spanish-language channels
Scrolling Preset List  MySXM – allowing you to personalize
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can your favorite music channels
Equipped
scroll the preset list by rotation of the TUNE/ Go to siriusxm.com/getallaccess for more infor-
SCROLL knob, or by pressing the “Up and SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct satel-
mation
Down” arrow keys, located on the right of the lite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
screen. provide clear, coast to coast radio content. Siri- SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
usXM® is a subscription based service. separately after the 12-month trial included
Preset Selection From List with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to
SiriusXM® All Access Package
A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the continue your service at the end of your trial
listed Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/ All satellite radio equipped vehicles come with a subscription, the plan you choose will automat-
BROWSE button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to one year trial to the SiriusXM® All Access ically renew and bill at then-current rates until
select the currently highlighted Preset. package, providing over 160 channels of the you call SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel.
best programming for all the places life takes See SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for
When selected, the radio tunes to the station
you. complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. All fees
stored in the Preset and returns to the main
radio screen.  In your vehicle — You’ll get every channel avail- and programming subject to change. Our satel-
able on your radio, including all the premium lite service is available only to those at least 18
programming like Howard Stern, every NFL® years and older in the 48 contiguous USA and
game, every MLB® game, every NASCAR® D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also
race, Oprah Radio, and more. available in PR (with coverage limitations). Our
MULTIMEDIA 231
Internet radio service is available throughout Canadian residents call: 1-877-438-9677 In addition to the tuning Operation functions
our satellite service area and in AK. © 2019 Siri- common to all Radio modes, the replay, Traffic/
NOTE:
usXM® Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related Weather Jump, and Fav button functions are
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® available in SiriusXM® Mode.
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
Radio Inc. Service available in Canada; see
www.siriusxm.ca. Replay
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
This functionality is only available for radios SXM button on the touchscreen. The replay function provides a means to store
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and
When in Satellite mode:
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is
The SXM button on the touchscreen is high- switched, content in replay memory is lost.
outside with a clear view to the sky. lighted.
If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might Press the Replay button on the touchscreen.
 The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top The play/pause, rewind/forward and live
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
of the screen. buttons will display at the top of the screen,
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite
radio does not receive a signal in underground  The Genre is displayed below the Presets Bar. along with the replay time.
parking garages or tunnels. You can exit by pressing the Replay button on
 The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in
No Subscription the touchscreen, any time during the Replay
the center.
mode.
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver,  The Program Information is displayed at the
require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. Play/Pause
bottom of the Channel Number.
When the Radio does not have the necessary Press the Pause/Play button on the touch-
subscription, the Radio is able to receive the  The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed screen to pause the playing of live or rewound
below the Program Information. 9
Pre-View channel only. content at any time. Play can be resumed again
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by by pressing of the Pause/Play button on the
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands. Refer touchscreen.
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US residents call: to Presets, Browse, Tune Knob, and Direct
1-800-643-2112 Tune.
232 MULTIMEDIA
Rewind You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of All

Press the RW button on the touchscreen to the X in the top right corner. Press the All button at the left of the Browse
rewind the content in steps of five seconds. The favorites feature enables you to set a Screen.
Pressing the RW button on the touchscreen for favorite artist, or song that is currently playing. Channel List
more than two seconds rewinds the content. The Radio then uses this information to alert
The Radio begins playing the content at the you when either the favorite song, or favorite Press the Channel List, or Genre, to display all
point at which the press is released. artist are being played at any time by any of the the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can
SiriusXM® Channels. scroll the Channel list by pressing the up and
Forward down arrows, located on the right side of the
Each press of the FW button on the touchscreen The maximum number of favorites that can be screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
forwards the content in steps of five seconds. stored in the Radio is 50. the TUNE/SCROLL knob.
Forwarding of the content can only be done Fav. Artist: While the song is playing to set a Genre
when the content is previously rewound, and Favorite Artist, press the Fav. button on the
therefore, can not be done for live content. A touchscreen and then the Fav. Artist button on Press the Genre button on the touchscreen to
continuous press of the FW button on the touch- the touchscreen. display a list of Genres. You can select any
screen also forwards the content. The Radio desired Genre by pressing the “Genre” list, the
Fav. Song: While the song is playing to set a Radio tunes to a channel with the content in the
begins playing the content at the point at which Favorite Song, press the Fav. button on the
the press is release. selected Genre.
touchscreen and then the Fav Song button on
Live the touchscreen. Presets
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to Press the Presets button located at the left of
Browse In SXM
resume playing of Live content. the Browse screen.
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
You can scroll the Presets list pressing the up
Favorites edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
and down arrows located at the right side of the
Press the Fav. button on the touchscreen to settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
activate the favorites menu, which will time out Channel List.
the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
in five seconds in absence of user interaction. This Screen contains many sub menus. You can
exit a sub menu to return to a parent menu by
pressing the back arrow.
MULTIMEDIA 233
Preset Selection Remove Favorites Select Teams

A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the Press the Select Teams button on the touch-
listed “Presets”, or by pushing the ENTER/ screen. Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to activate the League Scroll list. Press
BROWSE button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to screen to delete all of the Favorites or press the the chosen league and a scroll list of all teams
select the currently highlighted Preset. When trash can icon next to the Favorite to be deleted. within the league will appear, then you can
selected, the Radio tunes to the station stored Alert Settings select a team by pressing the corresponding
in the Preset, and returns to the main Radio box. A check mark appears for all teams that
screen. Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the are chosen.
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
Deleting A Preset choose from a Visual alert or Audible and Visual Remove Selection
A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse alert when one of your favorites is airing on any Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen by pressing the trash can Icon for the of the SiriusXM® channels. screen. Press the Delete All button on the touch-
corresponding Preset. Game Zone screen to delete all of the Selections or press
Favorites the trash can icon next to the Selection to be
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left deleted.
Press the Favorites button located at the left of of the Browse screen. This feature provides you
the Browse screen. with the ability to select teams, edit the selec- Alert Settings
The Favorites menu provides a means to Edit tion, and set alerts. Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
the Favorites list and to configure the Alert On Air screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
Settings, along with providing a list of Channels choose from “Alert me to on-air games upon
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The start” or “Alert upon score update” or both when
currently airing any of the items in the Favorites On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently
list. one or more of your selections is airing on any 9
airing any of the items in the Selections list, and of the SiriusXM® channels.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the pressing any of the items in the list tunes the
up and down arrows located at the right side of radio to that channel. Featured
the screen. Scrolling can also be done by oper- Press the Featured button, located on the left of
ating the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well. the Browse screen. This feature provides a list
of your favorited stations.
234 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Settings Pressing the Front, Rear, Left, or Right buttons The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing
or press and drag the red Speaker Icon to adjust of the + and – buttons. This alters the AUX input
Press the Audio button on the Satellite Radio
the Balance/Fade. audio volume. The level value, which spans
main menu, or within the Settings main menu,
Equalizer — If Equipped between plus or minus three, is displayed above
to activate the Audio settings screen to adjust
the adjustment bar.
Balance & Fade, Equalizer, Speed Adjusted
Volume, Loudness, AUX Volume Offset, Auto Speed Adjusted Volume
Play, and Auto on radio. Press the Speed Adjusted Volume button on the
You can return to the Radio screen by pressing touchscreen to activate the Speed Adjusted
the X located at the top right. Volume screen.
Balance & Fade The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by
selecting from “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3.” This alters
the automatic adjustment of the audio volume
with variation to vehicle speed. Volume
Equalizer increases automatically as speed increases to
compensate for normal road noise.
Press the Equalizer button on the touchscreen
to activate the Equalizer screen. Auto Play
Press the + or – buttons, or by pressing and

dragging over the level bar for each of the equal-
izer bands. The level value, which spans
Balance & Fade between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the
bottom of each of the Bands.
Press the Balance & Fade button on the touch-
screen to Balance audio between the front AUX Volume Offset
speakers or fade the audio between the rear Press the AUX Volume Offset button on the
and front speakers. touchscreen to activate the AUX Volume Offset
screen.
Auto Play
MULTIMEDIA 235
Press the Auto Play button on the touchscreen Media Mode Songs, etc. Press the desired button on the left
to activate the Auto Play screen. side of the screen. The center of the browse
USB/iPod® Mode window shows items and it’s sub-functions,
The Auto Play feature has two settings “On” and
“Off.” With Auto Play on, music will begin to play Overview which can be scrolled by pressing the Up and
from a connected device, immediately after it is Down buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll knob
USB/iPod® Mode is entered by either inserting can also be used to scroll.
connect to the radio. a USB device or iPod® with cable into the USB
Auto On Radio Port or by pressing the Select Source button on Media Mode
the left side of the display, and then selecting Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
USB 1, or USB 2 (if equipped). select the desired audio source: USB.
Seek Up /Seek Down Repeat
Press and release the Seek Up button on the Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB toggle the repeat functionality. The Repeat
device/iPod®. Press and release the Seek button on the touchscreen is highlighted when
active. The Radio will continue to play the
Down button on the touchscreen to return to
current track, repeatedly, as long as the repeat
the beginning of the current selection, or to
is active. Press the Repeat button on the touch-
return to the beginning of the previous selection
Auto On Radio screen a second time to turn this feature off.
if the USB device/iPod® is within the first three
Press the Auto On Radio button on the touch- seconds of the current selection. Shuffle
screen to activate the Auto On Radio screen. Browse Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to
play the selections on the USB/iPod® device in 9
The Auto On Radio feature, when activated, Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
turns the radio on automatically when the random order to provide an interesting change
display the browse window. The left side of the
vehicle is in RUN, or will recall whether it was on of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the touch-
browse window displays a list of ways you can
or off at last ignition cycle, if option is selected. screen a second time to turn this feature off.
browse through the contents of the USB device/
iPod®. If supported by the device, you can
browse by Folders, Artists, Playlists, Albums,
236 MULTIMEDIA
Info AUX Mode NOTE:

Press the Info button on the touchscreen to The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
Overview
display the current track information. Press the output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore if the
AUX (Auxiliary Mode) is entered by inserting an volume control on the Auxiliary device is set too
Info button on the touchscreen a second time to
AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio low, there will be insufficient audio signal for the
cancel this feature.
jack into the AUX port or by pressing the AUX radio unit to play the music on the device.
Tracks button on the left side of the display.
Media Mode
Press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to Inserting Auxiliary Device
display a pop up with the Song List. The Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
Gently insert the Auxiliary device cable into the select the desired audio source: AUX.
currently playing song is indicated by an arrow
AUX Port. If you insert an Auxiliary device with
and lines above and below the song title. When Audio
the ignition ON and the radio ON, the unit will
in the Tracks List screen you can rotate the
switch to AUX mode and begin to play when you Refer to Radio Mode in this section for adjusting
Tune/Scroll knob to highlight a track (indicated
insert the device cable if the device is already the audio settings.
by the line above and below the track name)
playing.
and then push the Enter/Browse knob to start Bluetooth® Mode
playing that track. Controlling The Auxiliary Device
Overview
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen The control of the auxiliary device (e.g.,
while the pop up is displayed will close the pop selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) or Blue-
up. cannot be provided by the radio; use the device tooth® Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth®
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the device, containing music, to the Uconnect
Audio
Volume/Mute rotary knob, or with the volume of System.
Refer to Radio Mode in this section for adjusting the attached device. Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must
the audio settings.
be paired to the Uconnect Phone to communi-
cate with the Uconnect System.
MULTIMEDIA 237
NOTE: Media Mode Android Auto™ is a feature of your Uconnect

See the pairing procedure in the Uconnect Phone Press the Media button on the touchscreen to system, and your Android™ 5.0 (Lollipop), or
section for more details. select the desired audio source: Bluetooth®. higher, powered smartphone with a data plan,
that allows you to project your smartphone and
To access Bluetooth® mode, press the Select Tracks a number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio
Source button on the left side of the display,
If the Bluetooth® device supports this feature, display. Android Auto™ automatically brings you
and then select Bluetooth®.
press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to useful information, and organizes it into simple
display a pop up with the Song List. The cards that appear just when they are needed.
currently playing song is indicated by a red Android Auto™ can be used with Google's
arrow and lines above and below the song title. best-in-class speech technology, the steering
wheel controls, the knobs and buttons on your
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
radio faceplate, and the radio display’s touch-
while the pop up is displayed will close the pop
screen to control many of your apps. To use
up.
Android Auto™ follow the following procedure:
Audio
1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the
Refer to Radio Mode in this section for adjusting Google Play store on your
Select Source the audio settings for further information. Android™-powered smartphone.
Seek Up /Down Android Auto™ 2. Connect your Android™ powered smart-
phone to one of the media USB ports in
Press and release the Right Arrow button on NOTE:
your vehicle. If the Android Auto™ app was
the touchscreen for the next selection on the Feature availability depends on your carrier and 9
not downloaded, the first time you plug
Bluetooth® device. Press and release the Left mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
your device in, the app will begin to down-
Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to Auto™ features may or may not be available in
load.
the beginning of the current selection, or return every region and/or language.
to the beginning of the previous selection if the
Bluetooth® device is within the first second of
the current selection.
238 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: NOTE: You can also touch the Navigation icon in

Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an Android Auto™ to access Google Maps™.
that came with your phone, as aftermarket area with cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may
NOTE:
cables may not work. use cellular data and your cellular coverage is
If the Voice Recognition button is not held, and is
shown in the upper right corner of the radio
only pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR will prompt
screen.
you and any navigation command said to launch
the built-in Uconnect navigation system.
While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™
provides voice-guided information for:
 Navigation
 Live traffic information

 Lane guidance
Android Auto™
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be Signal Strength
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan: NOTE:
 Google Maps™ for navigation Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher and download
 Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc.
app on Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™
for music
and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
 Handsfree Calling, and Texting for communica-
Android Auto™ Maps
tion
Push and hold the VR button on the steering Android Auto™ Maps
 Hundreds of compatible apps wheel or tap the microphone icon to ask Google
to take you to a desired destination by voice.
MULTIMEDIA 239
NOTE: For further information, refer to NOTE:

If you are using the built-in Uconnect navigation www.android.com/auto/. Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set
system, and you try and start a new route using For further information on the navigation func- up on your smartphone prior to using Android
the Android Auto™, via voice or any other method, tion, please refer to https:// Auto™, for them to work with Android Auto™.
a pop-up will appear asking if you would like to support.google.com/android or https://
switch from Uconnect navigation to smartphone support.google.com/androidauto/.
navigation. A pop-up will also appear, asking if
you’d like to switch, if Android Auto™ is currently Android Auto™ Music
in use and you attempt to launch a built-in Android Auto™ allows you to access and stream
Uconnect route. Selecting “Yes” will switch the your favorite music with apps like Google Play
navigation type to the newly used method of navi- Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your
gation and a route will be planned for the new smartphone’s data plan, you can stream
destination. If “No” is selected the navigation endless music on the road.
type will remain unchanged.
Android Auto™ Music
NOTE:
To see the metadata for the music playing
through Android Auto™, select the Uconnect
System’s media screen.
For further information refer to https://
support.google.com/androidauto. 9
Swapping Navigation
240 MULTIMEDIA
Android Auto™ Communication Apple CarPlay® Integration

With Android Auto™ connected, press and hold NOTE:
the Voice Recognition button on the steering Feature availability depends on your carrier and
wheel to activate voice recognition specific to mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
the Android Auto™. This will allow you to send CarPlay® features may or may not be available in
and reply to text messages, have incoming text every region and/or language.
messages read out loud, and place and receive
hands-free calls. Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple
CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure way to use
Call In Progress your iPhone® in the car, and stay focused on
the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen
Android Auto™ Apps display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and
The Android Auto™ App will display all the your voice with Siri to get access to Apple
compatible apps that are available to use with Music®, Maps, Messages, and more.
Android Auto™, every time it is launched. You
must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed into the app for it to
work with Android Auto™. Refer to g.co/android-
Contact List auto to see the latest list of available apps for
Android Auto™.
MULTIMEDIA 241
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your NOTE:
using iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Uconnect system, the following features can be To use Apple CarPlay® make sure that cellular
Settings, ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for utilized using your iPhone’s® data plan: data is turned on, and that you are in an area with
the very first connection only, and then use the  Phone cellular coverage. Your data and cellular
following procedure: coverage is shown on the left side of the radio
 Music screen.
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.  Maps
NOTE:  Messages
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning
cable that came with your phone, as aftermarket
cables may not work.
Signal Strength
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®. 9
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
Apple CarPlay®
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple®
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
242 MULTIMEDIA
Apple CarPlay® Phone Apple CarPlay® Maps

With Apple CarPlay®, push and hold To use your Apple® Maps for naviga-
the Voice Recognition button on the tion on your Uconnect system, launch
steering wheel to activate a Siri voice Apple CarPlay®, and push and hold
recognition session. You can also the Voice Recognition button on the
push and hold the Home button within Apple steering wheel to use Siri to set your desired
CarPlay® to start talking to Siri. This allows you destination. Alternatively, choose a Nearby
to make calls or listen to voice mail as you destination by pressing Destinations and
normally would using Siri on your iPhone®. selecting a category, by launching Siri from the
Apple CarPlay® Music destinations page, or even by typing in a desti-
NOTE:
nation.
Only temporarily pushing the Voice Recognition Apple CarPlay® Messages
button on the steering wheel launches a built-in Apple CarPlay® also allows you to use
VR session, not a Siri session, and it will not func- Siri to send or reply to text messages.
tion with Apple CarPlay®. Siri can also read incoming text
Apple CarPlay® Music messages, but driver’s will not be able
to read messages, as everything is done via
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access voice.
all your artists, playlists, and music
from iTunes®. Using your iPhone’s®
data plan, you can also use select
third party audio apps including music, news,
Apple CarPlay® Maps
sports, podcasts and more.
MULTIMEDIA 243
NOTE: Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips And

Trick
 If the Voice Recognition button is not held, and
is only pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR will AutoPlay
prompt you and any navigation command said AutoPlay is a feature of the Uconnect system
will launch the built-in Uconnect navigation that automatically begins playing music off of
system. the connected device, as soon as it is
 If you are using the built-in Uconnect navigation connected. This feature can be turned on or off
system, and you try and start a new route using in the Uconnect Settings, within the Audio
Apple CarPlay®, via voice or any other method, Settings category. It’s default setting is on.
Navigation Swap
a pop-up will appear asking if you would like to NOTE:
switch from Uconnect navigation to iPhone® Apple CarPlay® Apps AutoPlay is not supported by Android Auto™.
navigation. A pop-up will also appear, asking if To use a compatible app with Apple CarPlay®,
you’d like to switch, if an Apple CarPlay® navi- AutoShow
you must have the compatible app downloaded,
gation is currently in use and you attempt to AutoShow is a feature of the Uconnect system
and you must be signed into the app.
launch a built-in Uconnect route. Selecting that automatically launches and displays
“Yes” will switch the navigation type to the Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ Android Auto™/Apple CarPlay® when the
newly used method of navigation and a route (US Residents) or https://www.apple.com/ca/ phone is initially connected to the USB media
will be planned for the new destination. If “No” ios/carplay/ (Canadian Residents) to see the port. This feature can be turned on and off in
is selected the navigation type will remain latest list of available apps for Apple CarPlay®. the Uconnect Settings, within the Display
unchanged. Settings category. The default setting is on.
9
244 MULTIMEDIA
Android Auto™ Automatic Bluetooth® Pairing NOTE: 1 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
After connecting to Android Auto™ for the first  If using a Samsung device, every time it is 2 — Siri
time and undergoing the setup procedure, the connected to a media USB, and there is 3 — Mute Microphone
smartphone will automatically pair to the another device plugged in, you will need to 4 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any manually change the configuration of the USB 5 — Conference Call*
setup required every time it is within range, if connection in order for the Samsung device to 6 — Phone Settings
Bluetooth® is turned on. send data. 7 — Text Messaging**
NOTE: 8 — Direct Dial Pad
 The Uconnect 4 built-in media functions will be
Android Auto™ features cannot be used with 9 — Recent Call Log
unavailable when Android Auto™/Apple
Bluetooth®, a USB connection is required for its CarPlay® are in use. 10 — Browse Phone Book Entries
use. Android Auto™ uses both Bluetooth® and 11 — End Call
USB connections to function, and the connected Phone Mode 12 — Call/Redial/Hold
device will be unavailable to other devices when 13 — Favorite Contacts
connected using Android Auto™. Overview
14 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect 15 — Do Not Disturb
System 16 — Reply with Text Message
* — Conference Call feature only available on GSM
It is possible to have multiple devices
mobile devices
connected to the Uconnect system. For
** — Text messaging feature not available on all mo-
example, if using Android Auto™/Apple
bile phones (requires Bluetooth® Message Access
CarPlay®, the connected device will be the one Profile (MAP) profile)
that will be used to place hands-free phone calls
or send hands-free text messages. However,
another device can also be paired to the Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
Uconnect system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio Uconnect 4 Phone Menu hands-free, in-vehicle communications system.
source, so the passenger can stream music. Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone
number with your mobile phone.
MULTIMEDIA 245
Uconnect Phone supports the following NOTE: Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted
features: Examples of Voice Commands are provided through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
Voice Activated Features: throughout this manual. For quick use, go to the automatically mutes your radio when using the
Uconnect Voice Recognition Quick Tips Section. Uconnect Phone.
 Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith
Mobile” or, “Dial 248-555-1212”). Screen Activated Features: For Uconnect customer support:
 Dialing via keypad using touchscreen.  US residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call:
 Hands-Free text to speech listening of your
877-855-8400
incoming SMS (Short Message Service)  Viewing and calling contacts from phonebooks
messages. displayed on the touchscreen.  Canadian residents - (English) call:
800-465-2001
 Hands-free text message reply. (Forward one of  Setting favorite contact phone numbers so
18 pre-defined SMS messages to incoming they are easily accessible on the main phone or (French) call: 800-387-9983
calls/text messages). screen.  Visit UconnectPhone.com
 Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).  Viewing and calling contacts from recent call Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
 Calling back the last incoming call number logs. between the system and your mobile phone as
(“Call Back”). you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to
 Reviewing your recent incoming SMS.
mute the system's microphone for private
 View call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls,  Listen to music on your Bluetooth® device via conversation.
” “Show Outgoing calls,” “Show missed Calls,” the touchscreen.
“Show Recent Calls”). WARNING!
 Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy
 Searching contacts phone number (“Search for access to connect to them quickly. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the 9
John Smith Mobile”). steering wheel. You have full responsibility
NOTE: and assume all risks related to the use of
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging the Uconnect features and applications in
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is
properly. safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
246 MULTIMEDIA
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your The button on your steering wheel is also You will be prompted for a specific command
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. used to access the Voice Commands for the and then guided through the available options.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology - the Uconnect Voice Command features if your  Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait
global standard that enables different elec- vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect for the beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt
tronic devices to connect to each other without Voice Command section for direction on how to or another prompt.
wires or a docking station, so Uconnect Phone use the button.
works no matter where you stow your mobile  For certain operations, compound commands
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the can be used. For example, instead of saying
long as your phone is turned on and has been vehicle's audio system. The volume of the “Call” and then “John Smith” and then
paired to the vehicle's Uconnect Phone. The Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from “mobile”, the following compound command
Uconnect Phone allows up to 10 mobile phones the radio volume control knob or from the can be said: “Call John Smith mobile.”
or audio devices to be linked to the system. Only steering wheel radio control (right switch), if
 For each feature explanation in this section,
one linked (or paired) mobile phone, and one equipped. only the compound command form of the voice
audio device, can be used with the system at a command is given. You can also break the
Phone Operation
time. commands into parts and say each part of the
Uconnect Phone Button Operation command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound command
The Uconnect Phone button on your steering Voice commands can be used to operate the
form voice command “Search for John Smith,”
wheel is used to get into the phone mode and Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the
or you can break the compound command
make calls, show recent, incoming, outgoing Uconnect Phone menu structure. Voice form into two voice commands: “Search
calls, view phonebook etc. commands are required after most Uconnect Contact” and when asked “John Smith.” Please
Phone prompts. There are two general methods remember, the Uconnect Phone works best
Uconnect Voice Command Button for how Voice Command works: when you talk in a normal conversational tone,
The Uconnect Voice Command button on 1. Say compound commands like “Call John as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
your steering wheel is only used for “barge in” Smith mobile.” meters away from you.
and when you are already in a call and you want
to send tones or make another call. 2. Say the individual commands and allow
the system to guide you to complete the
task.
MULTIMEDIA 247
Natural Speech Help Command To complete the pairing process, you will need
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you to reference your mobile phone Owner's
Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR) want to know your options at any prompt, say Manual. Please visit UconnectPhone.com for
engine. “Help” following the beep. complete mobile phone compatibility informa-
tion.
Natural speech allows the user to speak To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle,
commands in phrases or complete sentences. simply push the Phone VR button on your NOTE:
The system filters out certain non-word utter- steering wheel and say a command or say
 You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
ances and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.” The “help.” All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with
phone to complete this procedure.
system handles fill-in words such as “I would a push of the Phone VR button on the steering
like to.” wheel controls.  The vehicle must be in PARK.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same Cancel Command 1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone position.
call” and “to Kelly Smith.” For multiple inputs in At any prompt, after the beep, you can say
the same phrase or sentence, the system iden- “Cancel” and you will be returned to the main 2. Press the Phone button in the Menu Bar on
tifies the topic or context and provides the asso- menu. the touchscreen.
ciated follow-up prompt such as “Who do you You can also push the Phone VR or Voice  If there are no phones currently
want to call?” in the case where a phone call Command button on your steering wheel connected with the system, a pop-up will
was requested but the specific name was not when the system is listening for a command and appear asking if you would like to pair a
recognized. be returned to the main or previous menu. mobile phone.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone 3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process. 9
system requires more information from the user
it will ask a question to which the user can To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must
respond without pushing the Voice Command pair your compatible Bluetooth® enabled
button on your steering wheel. mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the
process of establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the Uconnect
system.
248 MULTIMEDIA
4. Search for available devices on your Blue-  Search for available devices on your system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply
tooth® enabled mobile phone. Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone (see select Uconnect from the mobile phone/
 Press the Settings button on your mobile below). When prompted on the phone, audio device Bluetooth® screen, and the
phone. select Uconnect and accept the connec- Uconnect system will reconnect to the
tion request. Bluetooth® device.
 Select Bluetooth® and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile 5. Uconnect Phone will display an in progress Pair Additional Mobile Phones
phone will begin to search for Blue- screen while the system is connecting.
1. Press the Phone button on the touch-
tooth® connections. 6. When your mobile phone finds the screen, then press the Settings button on
Uconnect system, select Uconnect. the touchscreen from the Phone main
screen.
7. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from 2. Press the Add Device button on the touch-
Uconnect Phone. screen.
NOTE: 3. Search for available devices on your Blue-
Some mobile phones will require you to enter the tooth® enabled mobile phone. When
PIN number. prompted on the phone, enter the name
and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.
8. When the pairing process has successfully
Uconnect 4/4 NAV been completed, the system will prompt 4. Uconnect Phone will display an in process
If No is selected, and you still would like to you to choose whether or not this is your screen while the system is connecting.
pair a mobile phone, press the Phone Set- favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make
this phone the highest priority. This phone 5. When the pairing process has successfully
tings button from the Uconnect Phone
will take precedence over other paired completed, the system will prompt you to
main screen.
phones within range and will connect to choose whether or not this is your favorite
 Select Paired Phones then press the Add the Uconnect system automatically when phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this
Device button on the touchscreen. entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone the highest priority. This phone will
phone and/or one Bluetooth® audio take precedence over other paired phones
device can be connected to the Uconnect within range.
MULTIMEDIA 249
NOTE: 5. Search for available devices on your Blue- Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio
For phones which are not made a favorite, the tooth® enabled audio device. When Device After Pairing
phone priority is determined by the order in which prompted on the device, enter the PIN Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to
it was paired. The latest phone paired will have shown on the Uconnect screen. the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio
the higher priority. Device within range. If you need to choose a
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in process
You can also use the following VR commands to screen while the system is connecting. particular phone or Audio Device follow these
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any steps:
7. When the pairing process has successfully
screen on the radio: 1. Press the Phone button on the touch-
been completed, the system will prompt
 “Show Paired Phones” or screen, then the Settings button on the
you to choose whether or not this is your
favorite device. Selecting Yes will make touchscreen.
 “Connect My Phone”
this device the highest priority. This device 2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device will take precedence over other paired Sources button on the touchscreen.
1. Press the Media button on the touch- devices within range.
3. Press to select the particular Phone or the
screen to begin.
NOTE: particular Audio Device. A pop-up menu will
2. Change the Source to Bluetooth®. For devices which are not made a favorite, the appear, press Connect Phone.
device priority is determined by the order in which
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the touch- it was paired. The latest device paired will have 4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen to display the Paired Audio Devices the higher priority. screen.
screen.
You can also use the following VR command to Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
4. Press the Add Device button on the touch- 9
bring up a list of paired audio devices. 1. Press the Phone button on the touch-
screen.
 “Show Paired Phones” or screen, then the Settings button on the
NOTE: touchscreen.
 “Connect My Phone”
If there is no device currently connected with the
system, a pop-up will appear. 2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
Devices button on the touchscreen.
250 MULTIMEDIA
3. Select the Phone or the Audio Device that 2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio NOTE:
you want to disconnect. Devices button on the touchscreen. If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
4. Press the Disconnect Device button or 3. Select the Paired Phone or Paired Audio
Phone button on the touchscreen. Device you want to make a favorite. Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
5. Press the X to exit out of the Settings 4. Press the Add Favorite button on the touch-
screen. screen; you will see the chosen device If equipped and specifically supported by your
move to the top of the list. phone, Uconnect Phone automatically down-
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device loads names (text names) and number entries
5. Press the X to exit out of the Settings from the mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific
1. Press the Phone button on the touchscreen.
screen, then press the Settings button on Bluetooth® Phones with Phone Book Access
the touchscreen. Managing Your Favorites
Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect
website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported
2. Press the Pair Phones or Paired Audio There are two ways you can add an entry to your phones.
Devices button on the touchscreen. Favorites.
 To call a name from a downloaded mobile
3. Select the Phone or the Audio Device that 1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press phone book, follow the procedure in the
you want to delete. the Favorites button on the touchscreen, “Uconnect Voice Recognition Quick Tips”
and then press one of the +Add favorite section.
4. Press the Delete Device button or the Contact buttons that appears on the list.  Automatic download and update of a phone
Phone button on the touchscreen.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select book, if supported, begins as soon as the Blue-
5. Press the X to exit out of the Settings Contacts from the Phone main screen, tooth® wireless phone connection is made to
screen. then select the appropriate number. Press the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you
the down arrow symbol icon next to the start the vehicle.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
selected number to display the options  A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four
1. Press the Phone button on the touch- pop-up. In the pop-up select “Add to Favor- numbers per contact will be downloaded and
screen, then press the Settings button on ites.” updated every time a phone is connected to
the touchscreen. the Uconnect Phone.
MULTIMEDIA 251
 Depending on the maximum number of entries Phone Call Features Dial By Saying A Number
downloaded, there may be a short delay before
The following features can be accessed through 1. Push the VR button on your steering wheel
the latest downloaded names can be used.
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are avail- to begin.
Until then, if available, the previously down-
loaded phonebook is available for use. able and supported by Bluetooth® on your
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile
Only the phonebook of the currently connected following beep, say “Dial 151-123-4444.”
 service plan provides three-way calling, this
mobile phone is accessible. feature can be accessed through the Uconnect 3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number
Phone. Check with your mobile service provider 151-123-4444.
 This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited
for the features that you have.
or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
only be edited on the mobile phone. The Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
changes are transferred and updated to 1. Push the VR button on your steering wheel
Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection. Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a
to begin.
phone call with Uconnect Phone.
To Remove A Favorite  Redial 2. After the “Listening” prompt and the
following beep, say “Call John Doe Mobile.”
1. To remove a Favorite, select Favorites from  Dial by pressing in the number
the Phone main screen. 3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number
 Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call associated with John Doe, or if there are
2. Next select the down arrow icon next to the by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call multiple numbers it will ask which number
contact you want to remove from your Back) you want to call for John Doe.
favorites. This will bring up the options for
that favorite contact.  Favorites
Call Controls 9
3. Press Remove from Favs.  Mobile Phonebook The touchscreen allows you to control the
 Recent Call Log following call features:
 Answer
 SMS Message Viewer
 End
 Ignore
252 MULTIMEDIA
 Hold/unhold Recent Calls Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call

Currently In Progress
 Mute/unmute You may browse a list of the most recent of each
of the following call types: If a call is currently in progress and you have
 Transfer the call to/from the phone another incoming call, you will hear the same
 All Calls
 Swap two active calls network tones for call waiting that you normally
 Incoming Calls hear when using your mobile phone. Press the
 Join two active calls together Phone button on the steering wheel, answer
 Outgoing Calls
Touch-Tone Number Entry button on the touchscreen or caller ID box to
 Missed Calls place the current call on hold and answer the
1. Press the Phone button on the touch- These can be accessed by pressing the recent incoming call.
screen. calls button on the Phone main screen. NOTE:
2. Press the Dial button on the touchscreen. You can also push the VR button on your The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the
steering wheel and say “Show my incoming market today do not support rejecting an
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
calls” from any screen and the Incoming calls incoming call when another call is in progress.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touch- will be displayed. Therefore, the user can only answer an incoming
screens to enter the number and press call or ignore it.
Call. NOTE:
Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing,” Do Not Disturb
If your vehicle has two or three buttons on the “Recent” or “Missed.” With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifica-
steering wheel (VR, Phone Send, and Phone tions from incoming calls and texts, allowing
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
End) push the VR button to send a touch-tone you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on
Currently In Progress
and say “Send 1234#” the wheel. For your convenience, there is a
When you receive a call on your mobile phone,
counter display to keep track of your missed
the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle
calls and text messages while you were using
audio system. Push the Phone button on the Do Not Disturb.
steering wheel to accept the call. You can also
press the answer button on the touchscreen or
press the caller ID box.
MULTIMEDIA 253
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Call Termination
text message, a call or both, when declining an Progress
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
incoming call and send it to voicemail. You can place a call on hold by pressing the Phone End button on the touchscreen or the
Automatic reply messages can be: Hold button on the Phone main screen, then Phone End button on the steering wheel. Only
 “I am driving right now, I will get back to you dial a number from the dialpad, recent calls, the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
shortly.” SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks. To go back is a call on hold, it will become the new active
to the first call, refer to “Toggling Between Calls” call.
 Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 in this section. To combine two calls, refer to
characters. “Join Calls” in this section for further informa- Redial
NOTE: tion. Press the Redial button on the touchscreen, or
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the push the VR button. After the “Listening”
Toggling Between Calls
touchscreen while typing a custom message. prompt, and say “Redial” following the beep.
If two calls are in progress (one active and one
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be on hold), press the Swap button on the Phone The Uconnect Phone will call the last number
selected so you can still place a second call main screen. Only one call can be placed on that was dialed from your mobile phone.
without being interrupted by incoming calls. hold at a time. Call Continuation
NOTE: You can also push the Phone button to Call continuation is the progression of a phone
toggle between the active and held phone call. call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle
 Reply with text message is not compatible with
ignition has been switched to OFF.
iPhones®. Join Calls
NOTE:
 Auto reply with text message is only available When two calls are in progress (one active and 9
on phones that support Bluetooth® MAP. one on hold), press the Join Calls button on the The call will remain within the vehicle audio
Phone main screen to combine all calls into a system until the phone becomes out of range for
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
Conference Call. the Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to
During an active call, press the Hold button on press the transfer button on the touchscreen
the Phone main screen. when leaving the vehicle.
254 MULTIMEDIA
Browsing SMS Phone, follow the instructions described in your

mobile phone User's Manual.
WARNING!
Using the steering wheel commands, you can
view and manage the last ten SMS messages ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
Things You Should Know About Your wheel. You have full responsibility and
received on the instrument panel. To use this
Uconnect Phone assume all risks related to the use of the
function, the mobile phone must support the
SMS exchange function through Bluetooth®. Uconnect features and applications in this
Voice Command
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
Select Phone on the instrument panel menu For the best performance: do so. Failure to do so may result in an
and then select SMS reader using the arrow  Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½ accident involving serious injury or death.
keys on the steering wheel controls. inch (1 cm) gap between the overhead console
The ‘SMS reader’ submenu allows the last ten (if equipped) and the mirror. Even though the system is designed for many
SMS messages to be displayed. languages and accents, the system may not
 Always wait for the beep before speaking.
always work for some.
Advanced Phone Connectivity  Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/ NOTE:
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone It is recommended that you do not store names in
meters away from you.
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in
transferred from your mobile phone to the  Ensure that no one other than you is speaking motion.
Uconnect Phone without terminating the call. To during a voice command period.
Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recog-
transfer an ongoing call from your connected Performance is maximized under: nition rate is optimized when the entries are not
mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice
 Low-To-Medium Blower Setting similar. You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0”
versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone
(zero).
main screen.  Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Even though international dialing for most
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The  Low Road Noise number combinations is supported, some
Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone shortcut dialing number combinations may not
 Smooth Road Surface
If you would like to connect or disconnect the be supported.
Bluetooth® connection between a Uconnect  Fully Closed Windows
Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect  Dry Weather Condition
MULTIMEDIA 255
Far End Audio Performance OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to  Press Search to search for a Point Of Interest
Audio quality is maximized under: remain in Bluetooth® ON mode. (POI) or specific address.
 Low-To-Medium Blower Setting Power-Up  Press Current Route to view and edit the
current navigational route programed into the
 Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed After switching the ignition key from OFF to
system. This menu option is only available
either the ON or ACC position, or after a
 Low Road Noise when navigating to a destination.
language change, you must wait at least 15
 Smooth Road Surface seconds prior to using the system.  Press My Places to select from a list of saved
destinations, including the saved Home, Work,
 Fully Closed Windows Navigation Mode — If Equipped
and Recent destinations.
 Dry Weather Conditions Navigation Main Menu  Press My Routes to select from a list of saved
 Operation From The Driver's Seat To access the Navigation system, press the Nav routes.
button on the touchscreen.  Press Parking to open the map view with the
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone nearest parking locations labeled with markers
and network, and not the Uconnect Phone. on the map.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced  Press Gas Station to open the map view with
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume. the nearest gas station locations labeled with
markers on the map.
In a convertible vehicle, system performance
may be compromised with the convertible top  Press Settings, the gear icon, to open up the
down. settings menu and alter map, and route 9
settings.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Navigation Main Menu  Press Help, the question mark icon, to open up
Mobile phones have been found to lose connec- the help menu to access the about page.
tion to the Uconnect Phone. When this
happens, the connection can generally be
re-established by switching the mobile phone
256 MULTIMEDIA
Navigating A Route 2. If searching using an address begin typing NOTE:

the address using the displayed keyboard, Current Route can only be selected from the Navi-
Once a route is programmed the map view will
but if searching using the name of the gation Main Menu if the navigation system is
be displayed highlighting the route as a light
destination press Point of Interest first currently navigating to a destination.
blue bar in which the vehicle is to follow. On the
before typing.
right hand side of the screen is a route track Clear Route
that shows how far you are away from your final 3. Select the location from the list that Press this button on the touchscreen to clear
destination, and indicates stops and other appears. The display will switch to the map the current route from the navigation system.
points of interest along the way with icons that view and will show the location of the
move closer to your arrow icon as you approach selected destination. Change Route Type
them in distance. The distance to the next direc- Press this button on the touchscreen to change
tion is displayed at the top of the screen, and 4. Press the Navigate button, the red steering
the current routes type to one of the below
the main menu can be accessed at any time by wheel icon, to begin navigating to the
options:
pressing the Menu button on the touchscreen, selected location.
 Fastest route: routes the vehicle to the destina-
the four white dots icon in the bottom left-hand NOTE: tion using the roads that will take the least
corner of the screen. The route will continue to Pressing the More button, the three dot icon, next amount of time.
be displayed behind the menu as you travel to the Navigate button, the steering wheel icon,
along it.  Shortest route: routes the vehicle to the desti-
brings up the options to add the destination to
nation using the roads that will be the shortest
the My Places menu, add the destination to the
Search amount of total distance traveled.
current route, and more. Within the More option
To search for a destination, and start navigating is the option to use the destination as a starting  Most eco-friendly route: routes the vehicle to
a route, follow these steps: point and information about the location. the destination using the roads that will use the
least amount of fuel.
1. While in the Navigation Main Menu, press Current Route
the Search button on the touchscreen.  Avoid interstate highways: routes the vehicle to
From the Navigation Main Menu, press the the destination avoiding all interstate high-
Current Route button on the touchscreen and ways.
select one of the following to adjust or change
your current route.
MULTIMEDIA 257
Find Alternative Add Stop To Route My Places

Press this button on the touchscreen to view an Press this button on the touchscreen to add an Press the My Places button on the touchscreen
overhead view of your route, along with several additional stop to your current route. Pressing from the Navigation Main Menu to display a list
others to choose from. Each with the time differ- the Search button will bring up the keyboard of saved destinations that can be selected to
ence between your current route and these new where you can type in the address or name of navigate to. The following destinations are
ones. Select the colored button that corre- the destination you wish to add. selectable, along with any other destinations
sponds to the new route you want to take. Add To My Routes that have been saved.
Avoid Blocked Road Press this button on the touchscreen to add the Home
Press this button on the touchscreen to select a current route to the list of save routes in the My Press this button on the touchscreen to navi-
road you wish to avoid on your route that is Routes main Menu option. When this button is gate to the saved Home destination. If no Home
blocked. selected, a keyboard will appear so you may destination is saved, the navigation system will
Avoid Part Of Route name the route. ask you to search for the destination you wish to
Reorder Stops save as your Home destination.
Press this button on the touchscreen to bring up
the list of directions for your current route. Press this button on the touchscreen to reorder Recent Destinations
Select the part of the route you wish to avoid the different stops on the current route. Press this button on the touchscreen to display
and the system will re-route the navigation track Play Route Preview a list of destinations the navigation has recently
to your destination. routed to for you to select.
Press this button on the touchscreen to begin a
Avoid On This Route simulated preview of what your route will look NOTE:
Press this button on the touchscreen to select like. The vehicle icon will begin traveling along The Add and Edit List buttons allow you to add 9
certain types of roads to avoid on your naviga- your route until it reaches its destination. You more, remove and reorder destinations that
tional route. can also end the preview by returning to the appear within the list.
Show Instructions Current Route menu and selecting Stop Route
Preview.
Press this button on the touchscreen to view the
directions of your route in list form.
258 MULTIMEDIA
My Routes gas stations. Press the desired gas station icon tions, sign information, road numbers, street
to bring up its location, and select the steering names, and foreign street names out loud.
Press the My Routes button from the Navigation
wheel icon to navigate to it. Route Planning
Main Menu to view a list of all your saved
routes. Select the route from the list you wish to SETTINGS Press this button on the touchscreen to adjust
use. If no routes have been saved “No saved the route planning features of the navigation
routes” will be displayed. From the Navigation Main Menu, press the
system. The route planning settings allow you to
Settings button, the gear icon, to open up the
NOTE: change whether or not the system will prompt
Settings menu. The following settings catego-
Press the Edit List button in the bottom right you when a faster route is available, which type
ries are selectable within the Settings Main
corner to reorder and delete routes from the list. of route it should plan when setting one (i.e.
Menu:
fastest, shortest, most eco-friendly, or to avoid
Parking Appearance interstate highways), and what to avoid on every
Press this button on the touchscreen to adjust route.
From the Navigation Main Menu, press the
Parking button on the touchscreen to bring up a the appearance settings of the navigation Sounds & Warnings
view of your current location on the map. Within system. The appearance settings allow you to
Press this button on the touchscreen to adjust
this map view, blue “P” icons will appear alter whether or not the system switches to
how the navigation system should warn yo
pointing out the locations of nearby parking lots. night colors when it is dark, change the arrival
during a route. The sounds and warnings
Press the desired parking lot icon to bring up information that is displayed, change what
settings allows you to set the warning type the
the location, and select the steering wheel icon appears on the route (i.e. highway exits), when
system will sound, and whether or not to warn
to navigate to it. the system automatically zooms, and adjust the
you when the vehicle is traveling above the
guidance view style from 3D, 2D and whether or
speed limit.
Gas Stations not to show the 3D car icon.
System
From the Navigation Main Menu, press the Gas Voices
Stations button on the touchscreen to bring up Press this button on the touchscreen to reset
Press this button on the touchscreen to adjust
a view of your current location on the map. the navigation system. This will reset the navi-
what the navigation system calls out while navi-
Within this map view, white “Gas Station” icons gation to its factory setting and remove all
gating. The voices settings allow you to turn on
will appear pointing out the locations of nearby saved data.
and off whether the system reads early instruc-
MULTIMEDIA 259
Help The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch Player Operation

Press the question mark icon to enter the with a pushbutton in the center and controls the
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the
“Help” menu. Within the help menu you may volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing
next track on the Player. Pushing the bottom of
view the “about” page that display system infor- the top of the rocker switch will increase the
the switch once will go to the beginning of the
mation. volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker
current track, or to the beginning of the previous
switch will decrease the volume.
track if it is within one second after the current
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS Pushing the center button will make the radio track begins to play.
switch between the various modes available
The remote sound system controls are located If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays
(AM/FM/SAT/AUX/Media Player, etc.).
at the rear of the steering wheel. Reach behind the second track; three times, it will play the
the wheel to access the switches. The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with third, etc.
a pushbutton in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on IPOD®/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL
which mode you are in.
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB
The following describes the left-hand control device to be plugged into the USB ports.
operation in each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for
the next listenable station and pushing the
bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for the
Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel) next listenable station. 9
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio preset
button. Instrument Panel USB Port
1 — Standard USB Ports
260 MULTIMEDIA
Rear Seat Charge Only USB recommended that the radio volume be turned The following regulatory statement applies to all
There is also a Rear Seat USB port located on down or off during mobile phone operation Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
the back of the center console that can be used when not using Uconnect (if equipped). vehicle:
to charge USB devices. Regulatory And Safety Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
The radiated output power of the internal wire- following two conditions:
less radio is far below the FCC and IC radio 1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the ence, and
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the 2. This device must accept any interference
human body. received, including interference that may
The internal wireless radio operates within
Rear Seat USB
guidelines found in radio frequency safety stan- Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
Refer to the Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch dards and recommendations, which reflect the dÌnnovation, Science and Economic Develop-
Display section for iPod® and external USB consensus of the scientific community. ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
support capability.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The conditions suivantes:
level of energy emitted is far less than the elec-
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
tromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or lage, et
such as mobile phones. However, the use of
noisy performance from your radio. This condi- wireless radios may be restricted in some situa- 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
tion may be lessened or eliminated by relo- tions or environments, such as aboard brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
cating the mobile phone antenna. This airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your are encouraged to ask for authorization before ettre le fonctionnement.
radio performance does not satisfactorily turning on the wireless radio.
“clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
MULTIMEDIA 261
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las  If this equipment does cause harmful interfer-
siguientes dos condiciones: ence to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
cause interferencia perjudicial y the interference by one or more of the following
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar measures:
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que a. Increase the separation between the
pueda causar su operación no deseada. equipment and receiver.
NOTE: b. Consult an authorized dealer or an Uconnect 4 NAV
Changes or modifications not expressly approved experienced radio technician for help.
by the party responsible for compliance could If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in
void the user’s authority to operate the equip- UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK the Apps menus, of your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 4 NAV system. If not, you have a
ment.
TIPS Uconnect 4 system.
NOTE:
Introducing Uconnect Get Started
 This equipment has been tested and found to
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) All you need to control your Uconnect system
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key with your voice are the buttons on your steering
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to wheel.
These limits are designed to provide reason-
able protection against harmful interference in control your Uconnect 4/4 NAV system. 1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile
a residential installation. This equipment device and feature compatibility and to 9
generates, uses and can radiate radio find phone pairing instructions.
frequency energy and, if not installed and used
in accordance with the instructions, may cause 2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
harmful interference to radio communications. passenger conversations are examples of
However, there is no guarantee that interfer- noise that may impact recognition.
ence will not occur in a particular installation.
262 MULTIMEDIA
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume Basic Voice Commands Radio
while facing straight ahead.
The basic Voice Commands below can be given Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you at any point while using your Uconnect system. SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would
must first push either the VR or Phone Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After like to hear. (Subscription or included Siri-
button, wait until after the beep, then say the beep, say: usXM® Satellite Radio trial required.)
your Voice Command. Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
 “Cancel” to stop a current voice session
5. You can interrupt the help message or the beep, say:
 “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
system prompts by pushing the VR or  “Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
Commands
Phone button and saying a Voice
 “Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Command from current category.  “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
TIP:
At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR
button on the steering wheel and say “Help.” The
system provides you with a list of commands.
Uconnect Voice Command Uconnect 4/4 NAV Basic Voice Commands

1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
Or Receive A Text voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear
2 — Push To Say Vocal Commands on the touchscreen.
3 — Push To End Call
Uconnect 4/4 NAV Radio
MULTIMEDIA 263
Media  “Redial (call previous outgoing phone

number)”
Uconnect offers connections via USB or Blue-
tooth®. Voice operation is only available for  “Call back (call previous incoming phone
connected USB and iPod® devices. number)”
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After TIP:
the beep, say one of the following commands When providing a Voice Command, push the VR
and follow the prompts to switch your media button on the steering wheel and say “Call,” then
source or choose an artist. pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your
 “Change source to Bluetooth®” Uconnect 4/4 NAV Media phone book. When a contact has multiple phone
numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work,
 “Change source to USB” Phone home, cell, etc.”
 “Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest Making and answering hands-free phone calls
Hits”; “Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play is easy with Uconnect. When the Phone button
genre Classical” is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system
is ready to make a phone call. You may have to
TIP:
wait for a few more moments to issue a Voice
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
Command for hands-free calling. Check Ucon-
see all of the music on your USB device. Your
nectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility
Voice Command must match exactly how the
and pairing instructions (for U.S. and Canadian
artist, album, song and genre information is
residents).
displayed. 9
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
Uconnect 4/4 NAV Phone
the beep, say one of the following commands:
 “Call John Smith” Navigation (4 NAV) — If Equipped
 “Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save
prompts” time and become more productive when you
know exactly how to get to where you want to go.
264 MULTIMEDIA
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped Android Auto™ — If Equipped
on the steering wheel. After the beep, say,
Available on iPhone® 4s or later. NOTE:
“Navigate to 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn
Hills, Michigan or Enter State.” Siri lets you use your voice to send text Feature availability depends on your carrier and
messages, schedule meetings, select media, mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
2. Then follow the system prompts. place phone calls and much more. Siri uses Auto™ features may or may not be available in
your natural language and interacts with every region and/or language.
requests. The system is designed to keep your Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to
eyes on the road and your hands on the wheel interact with Android’s™ best-in-class speech
by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks. technology through your vehicle’s voice recogni-
Press and hold the VR button on the steering tion system, and use your smartphone’s data
wheel to activate Siri. As soon as your hear a plan to project your Android™-powered smart-
double beep, you can start interacting with Siri phone and a number of its apps onto your
to listen to music, get directions, read text Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android™
messages and more. 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher to one of the media USB
ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and
Uconnect 4 NAV Navigation
press the new Android Auto™ icon that replaces
TIP: your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to
To start a Point of Interest (POI) search, push the begin Android Auto™. Push and hold the VR
VR button on the steering wheel. After the beep, button on the steering wheel, or press and hold
say: “Find nearest coffee shop.” the “Microphone” icon within Android Auto™, to
activate Android’s™ VR, which recognizes
natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
 Maps
Siri® Eyes Free Available
 Music
 Phone
MULTIMEDIA 265
 Text Messages Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped  Messages

 Additional Apps NOTE:  Maps
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
 Additional Apps
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your iPhone® and a
number of its apps onto your Uconnect touch-
Android Auto™ screen. Connect your iPhone® 5, or higher, to
one of the media USB ports, using the
Refer to the “Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the Apple CarPlay®
Display” section for further information. new Apple CarPlay® icon that replaces your Refer to the “Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 7-inch
NOTE: “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Display” section for further information.
Requires compatible smartphone running Apple CarPlay®. Press and hold the VR button
on the steering wheel, or press and hold the NOTE:
Android™ 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher and download
Home button within Apple CarPlay®, to activate Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for
app on Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™,
Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
to use a list of your iPhone’s® features: Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®. 9
 Phone
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
 Music tered in the US and other countries. Apple®
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
266 MULTIMEDIA
General Information Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR Additional Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all © 2019 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
vehicle: Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc. Siri-
Rules and with Innovation, Science and 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil- usXM® and all related marks and logos are
Economic Development Canada license-exempt lage, et trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout Uconnect System Support:
following two conditions: brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le  US residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer- brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom- 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
ettre le fonctionnement. week)
ence, and
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las  Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or
2. This device must accept any interference
call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
received, including interference that may siguientes dos condiciones:
1-800-387-9983 (French)
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.
267
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE Be Reasonable With Requests This is why you should always talk to an autho-
rized dealer service manager first. Most matters
If you list a number of items and you must have
FOR YOUR VEHICLE your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
can be resolved with this process.
Prepare For The Appointment situation with the service advisor and list the  If for some reason you are still not satisfied,
items in order of priority. At many authorized talk to the general manager or owner of the
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a authorized dealer. They want to know if you
have the right papers with you. Take your minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is need assistance.
warranty folder. All work to be performed may advisable to make these arrangements when
not be covered by the warranty. Discuss addi-  If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
you call for an appointment. concern, you may contact the manufacturer's
tional charges with the service manager. Keep a
maintenance log of your vehicle's service IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE customer center.
history. This can often provide a clue to the Any communication to the manufacturer's
current problem. The manufacturer and its authorized dealers
are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We customer center should include the following
Prepare A List want you to be happy with our products and information:
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or services.  Owner's name and address
the specific work you want done. If you've had Warranty service must be done by an autho-  Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
an accident or work done that is not on your rized dealer. We strongly recommend that you office)
maintenance log, let the service advisor know. take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They
know your vehicle the best, and are most  Authorized dealer name
concerned that you get prompt and high quality  Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
service. The manufacturer's authorized dealers 10
have the facilities, factory-trained technicians,  Vehicle delivery date and mileage
special tools, and the latest information to
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
268 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC Customer Center Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
P.O. Box 21–8004
If you have any questions about the service
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 To assist customers who have hearing difficul-
contract, call the manufacturer's Service
ties, the manufacturer has installed special
Phone: (888) 242-6342 Contract National Customer Hotline at
Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf (TDD)
1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center equipment at its customer center. Any hearing
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
or speech impaired customer, who has access
P.O. Box 1621 French).
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 in the United States, can communicate with the FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY. contract you may have purchased from another
387-9983 French manufacturer. If you require service after the
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty
In Mexico Contact require assistance can use the special needs
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 and contact the person listed in those docu-
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
ments.
Sante Fe C.P. 05109 callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator. We appreciate that you have made a major
Mexico, D. F.
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
Service Contract
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300 authorized dealer has also made a major invest-
You may have purchased a service contract for ment in facilities, tools, and training to assure
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost that you are absolutely delighted with the
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's ownership experience. You will be pleased with
FCA Caribbean LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty
Mopar Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY issues or related concerns.
P.O. Box 191857 vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
San Juan 00919-1857 endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
Phone: (888) 242-6342 additional protection beyond your vehicle’s
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle
Fax: (787) 782-3345 Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 269
WARNING! REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
Engine exhaust (internal combustion In The 50 United States And Washington, 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
engines only), some of its constituents, and D.C.
certain vehicle components contain, or emit,
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
chemicals known to the State of California to
If you believe that your vehicle has a www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
cause cancer and birth defects, or other defect that could cause a crash or cause trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids injury or death, you should immediately SE., West Building, Washington, D.C.
contained in vehicles and certain products inform the National Highway Traffic 20590. You can also obtain other infor-
of component wear contain, or emit, Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi- mation about motor vehicle safety from
chemicals known to the State of California to tion to notifying FCA US LLC. http://www.safercar.gov.
cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it In Canada
may open an investigation, and if it finds If you believe that your vehicle has a
that a safety defect exists in a group of
WARRANTY INFORMATION vehicles, it may order a recall and
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department immedi-
See the Warranty Information for the terms and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
ately. Canadian customers who wish to
cannot become involved in individual report a safety defect to the Canadian
to this vehicle and market.
problems between you, an authorized government should contact Transport
MOPAR PARTS dealer, or FCA US LLC. Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investiga-
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories tions and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or
are available from an authorized dealer. They go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
are recommended for your vehicle in order to
10
help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
270 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Owner's Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
To order the following manuals, you may use diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. with the assistance of service and engineering
either the website or the phone numbers listed These practical manuals make it easy for specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
below. students and technicians to find and fix prob- LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating,
Service Manuals lems on computer-controlled vehicle systems emergency and maintenance procedures as
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide and features. They show exactly how to find and well as specifications, capabilities and safety
the information that students and professional correct problems the first time, using tips.
technicians need in diagnosing/trouble- step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability To access your Owner’s Information online, visit
shooting, problem solving, maintaining, procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a www.mopar.com
servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete list of all tools and equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Owner’s Informa-
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, tion, call Tech Authority toll free at:
system, and/or components is written in
 1-800-890-4038 (US)
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.  1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
 www.techauthority.com (US)
271
INDEX
A Air Pressure Autostick ............................................ 127
About Your Brakes .................................. 206 Tires ..............................................193 Aux Mode............................................ 236
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............... 182 Alarm
Adding Fuel .......................................... 136 Security Alarm .............................. 12, 67 B
Adding Washing Fluid ............................... 174 Alarm System Battery ..........................................67, 174
Additives, Fuel ....................................... 208 Security Alarm ....................................12 Charging System Light......................... 67
Air Bag Alterations/Modifications Belts, Seat .......................................... 115
Air Bag Operation ............................... 93 Vehicle ...............................................7 Bluetooth
Air Bag Warning Light .......................... 91 Android Auto .........................................264 Connect Or Disconnect Link Between
Driver Knee Air Bag .............................94 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................181, 211 the Uconnect Phone And Mobile
Enhanced Accident Response........ 98, 168 Disposal .........................................183 Phone ........................................ 254
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ................. 168 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .......................75 Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
If Deployment Occurs .......................... 97 Anti-Lock Warning Light ........................ 68, 71 Or Audio Device After Pairing ........... 249
Knee Impact Bolsters .......................... 94 Apple CarPlay ........................................265 Phone ........................................... 255
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .......... 101 Arming System Bluetooth Mode .................................... 236
Maintenance ................................... 101 Security Alarm ....................................12 Body Mechanism Lubrication ..................... 178
Side Air Bags ..................................... 94 Audio Settings .......................................234 B-Pillar Location .................................... 188
Transporting Pets ............................. 115 Auto Up Power Windows ..............................41 Brake Assist System ................................. 76
Air Bag Light ............................. 65, 91, 116 Automatic Dimming Mirror ...........................23 Brake Fluid .......................................... 213
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ... 177 Automatic Transmission .................... 122, 123 Brake System ................................184, 206
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...................... 177 Adding Fluid ....................................185 Anti-Lock (ABS) ................................ 206
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ......................... 177 Autostick ........................................127 Fluid Check .................................... 184
Air Conditioner System ............................. 177 Fluid And Filter Change ......................185 Master Cylinder ............................... 184
Air Conditioning Filter ................................. 39 Fluid Change ...................................185 Parking .......................................... 122
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ..................... 38 Fluid Level Check ......................184, 185 Warning Light .................................... 65 11
Air Filter .............................................. 177 Fluid Type ...............................184, 213
Special Additives ..............................185
272
Brake/Transmission Interlock ..................... 123 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Cybersecurity ....................................... 214
Bulb Replacement .................................. 142 Children ......................................106
Bulbs, Light .................................. 117, 142 Older Children And Child Restraints .......104 D
Seating Positions ..............................105 Daytime Running Lights ............................. 25
C Child Safety Locks ....................................15 Dealer Service ...................................... 175
Camera, Rear ........................................ 134 Cigar Lighter ...........................................53 Deck Lid, Emergency Release....................... 45
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .......... 211 Clean Air Gasoline...................................208 Defroster, Windshield .............................. 116
Capacities, Fluid .................................... 211 Cleaning Diagnostic System, Onboard ........................ 73
Caps, Filler Wheels ...........................................199 Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ..................................... 176 Climate Control ........................................31 Oil (Engine) ..................................... 174
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................ 182 Automatic .........................................37 Disposal
Car Washes .......................................... 203 Compact Spare Tire .................................197 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................ 183
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................. 115, 210 Contract, Service ....................................268 Do Not Disturb ...................................... 252
Cargo Area Cover ..................................... 45 Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................211 Door Ajar .............................................. 68
Cargo Compartment ..................................45 Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .............182 Door Ajar Light ........................................ 68
Cellular Phone ....................................... 260 Cooling System ......................................181 Doors .................................................. 13
Center High Mounted Stop Light .................. 146 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .................182 Drag And Drop Menu ............................... 228
Certification Label .................................. 137 Coolant Level ...........................181, 183 Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ............................... 15
Chains, Tire .......................................... 200 Disposal Of Used Coolant ...................183 Driving
Changing A Flat Tire ........................ 152, 186 Drain, Flush, And Refill .......................181 Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) .. 74 Inspection .......................................183 Standing Water ............................ 140
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 115 Points To Remember .........................183
Checks, Safety ...................................... 115 Pressure Cap ...................................182 E
Child Restraint ...................................... 102 Radiator Cap ...................................182 Electric Brake Control System....................... 76
Child Restraints Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........181 Anti-Lock Brake System ....................... 75
Booster Seats .................................. 104 Corrosion Protection ................................203 Brake Assist System ........................... 76
Child Seat Installation ........................ 113 Cruise Light ......................................72, 73 Electric Remote Mirrors.............................. 24
How To Stow An UNUSED ALR Cupholders.............................................53 Electrical Power Outlets ............................. 53
Seat Belt ..................................... 110 Customer Assistance ...............................267 Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) .................... 77
Infant And Child Restraints ................. 103 Customer Programmable Features ................215 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ....... 128
273
Electronic Stability Control Exhaust Gas Cautions ......................115, 210 Fuel .................................................. 207
(ESC) ................................................... 77 Exhaust System .............................115, 179 Adding ........................................... 136
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light........... 66 Exterior Lights .................................25, 117 Additives ........................................ 208
Emergency Deck Lid Release ........................45 Capacity ........................................ 211
Emergency Trunk Release ........................... 45 F Clean Air ........................................ 208
Emergency, In Case Of Filters Ethanol.......................................... 208
Jacking .................................. 152, 186 Air Cleaner ......................................177 Gasoline ........................................ 207
Jump Starting .................................. 161 Air Conditioning ..................................39 Light ............................................... 68
Towing ........................................... 167 Engine Fuel .....................................211 Materials Added .............................. 208
Emission Control System Maintenance ............. 74 Engine Oil .......................................176 Methanol ....................................... 208
Engine Engine Oil Disposal ...........................176 Octane Rating ................................. 207
Air Cleaner ...................................... 177 Flashers ..............................................142 Requirements ................................. 207
Break-In Recommendations ................ 119 Hazard Warning................................142 Tank Capacity ................................. 211
Checking Oil Level ............................ 174 Turn Signals ..............................72, 117 Fueling............................................... 136
Compartment .................................. 173 Flash-To-Pass ..........................................26 Fuses ................................................ 146
Cooling........................................... 181 Flat Tire Changing ...........................186, 197
Exhaust Gas Caution ................. 115, 210 Flat Tire Stowage .................... 159, 186, 197 G
Fails To Start ................................... 119 Flooded Engine Starting ............................119 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ................... 48
Flooded, Starting .............................. 119 Fluid Capacities .....................................211 Gasoline, (Fuel) ..............................207, 211
Fuel Requirements ........................... 207 Fluid Leaks...........................................117 Gasoline, Clean Air ................................. 208
Jump Starting .................................. 161 Fluid Level Checks Gasoline, Reformulated ........................... 208
Oil ......................................... 175, 211 Brake .............................................184 Gear Ranges ........................................ 124
Oil Filler Cap .................................... 176 Engine Oil .......................................174 Gear Selector Override............................. 165
Oil Filter ......................................... 176 Fluid, Brake ..........................................213 Glass Cleaning ...................................... 205
Oil Selection .................................... 175 Fluids And Lubricants ...............................211 GVWR ................................................ 137
Oil Synthetic .................................... 176 Fog Lights ..............................................26
Overheating .................................... 163 Fold And Tumble Rear Seat ..........................18
Starting .......................................... 118 Fold-Flat Seats ........................................15 11
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ..... 98, 168 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ............................165
Ethanol ............................................... 208
274
H iPod/USB/MP3 Control .....................235, 259 Lights ...........................................25, 117

Hazard Air Bag ...............................65, 91, 116
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or J Brake Assist Warning .......................... 78
Shallow Standing Water .................. 140 Jack Location ........................................152 Brake Warning .................................. 65
Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 142 Jack Operation ...................... 152, 155, 186 Bulb Replacement............................ 142
Head Restraints .......................................20 Jacking Instructions .................................155 Center Mounted Stop ........................ 146
Headlights .............................................25 Jump Starting ........................................161 Cruise ........................................72, 73
Cleaning ......................................... 203 Electronic Stability Program(ESP)
Passing ............................................26 K Indicator ....................................... 66
Heated Mirrors ........................................24 Key Fob Exterior .....................................25, 117
Heated Steering Wheel ............................... 22 Programming Additional Key Fobs.......9, 11 Interior ............................................ 27
Hill Start Assist ........................................80 Key-In Reminder.......................................11 Low Fuel .......................................... 68
Holder, Cup ............................................53 Keys ......................................................8 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)...... 69
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener)....................48 Replacement .....................................11 Park...........................................26, 72
Hood Prop .............................................43 Sentry (Immobilizer) ............................11 Passing ........................................... 26
Hood Release ......................................... 43 Seat Belt Reminder ............................ 67
L Security Alarm ..............................12, 67
I Lap/Shoulder Belts ...................................86 Service .......................................... 142
Ignition .................................................10 Latches ...............................................117 Traction Control ................................. 78
Switch.............................................. 10 Hood ...............................................43 Turn Signals...............................72, 117
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) .............................11 Lead Free Gasoline .................................207 Vanity Mirror ..................................... 24
Inside Rearview Mirror ............................... 23 Leaks, Fluid ..........................................117 Warning Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster .................................... 55 Life Of Tires ..........................................195 Descriptions .............................66, 72
Descriptions ...................................... 72 Liftgate .................................................44 Loading Vehicle ..................................... 137
Display .............................................57 Light Bulbs ................................... 117, 142 Tires ............................................. 188
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .................. 205 Lighter Locks
Interior And Instrument Lights ....................... 27 Cigar ................................................53 Child Protection ................................. 15
Interior Appearance Care .......................... 204 Power Door....................................... 13
Interior Lights.......................................... 27 Lubrication, Body ................................... 178
Introduction ............................................. 6 Lug Nuts/Bolts ..............................206, 207
275
M Oil Change Indicator ..................................58 Personalized Main Menu .......................... 228

Maintenance Free Battery ......................... 174 Reset ...............................................58 Pets .................................................. 115
Maintenance Schedule ............................. 169 Oil Filter, Change ....................................176 Phonebook .......................................... 251
Making A Phone Call ................................ 251 Oil Filter, Selection ..................................176 Placard, Tire And Loading Information ........... 188
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .. 69, 74 Oil Pressure Light .....................................67 Power
Manual Oil, Engine ................................... 175, 211 Brakes .......................................... 206
Service........................................... 270 Capacity .........................................211 Door Locks ....................................... 13
Media Hub ........................................... 259 Change Interval ................................175 Mirrors ............................................ 24
Methanol............................................. 208 Checking ........................................174 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ........... 53
Mirrors .................................................23 Dipstick ..........................................174 Seats .............................................. 19
Automatic Dimming .............................23 Disposal .........................................176 Sunroof ........................................... 41
Electric Powered................................. 24 Filter ..............................................176 Power Steering Fluid ............................... 213
Electric Remote ..................................24 Filter Disposal ..................................176 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ................... 89
Heated .............................................24 Identification Logo ............................176 Preparation For Jacking............................ 154
Rearview .......................................... 23 Materials Added To ...........................176 Pretensioners
Vanity .............................................. 24 Pressure Warning Light ........................67 Seat Belts ........................................ 89
Modifications/Alterations Recommendation .....................175, 211
Vehicle ............................................... 7 Synthetic ........................................176 R
Monitor, Tire Pressure System....................... 81 Viscosity .........................................176 Radial Ply Tires ..................................... 193
Mopar Parts ......................................... 269 Onboard Diagnostic System..........................73 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............ 182
MP3 Control ......................................... 259 Operating Precautions ................................73 Radio
Multi-Function Control Lever .........................25 Operator Manual Presets .......................................... 229
Owner's Manual ...........................7, 270 Radio Operation .............................228, 260
N Overheating, Engine ................................163 Rear Camera ........................................ 134
New Vehicle Break-In Period ....................... 119 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ...................7 Rear Liftgate .......................................... 44
Reclining Rear Seats ................................. 17
O P Recreational Towing ............................... 139
Occupant Restraints ..................................84 Paint Care ............................................203 Reformulated Gasoline ............................ 208 11
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .................... 207 Park Assist System, Rear ...........................130 Refrigerant .......................................... 177
Parking Brake .......................................122 Release, Hood ........................................ 43
276
Reminder, Seat Belt ..................................85 Seat Belts ......................................85, 115 Security Alarm ...................................12, 67
Remote Keyless Entry Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ..........90 Sentry Key
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........11 Child Restraints ................................102 Key Programming............................... 11
Replacement Bulbs ................................. 142 Energy Management Feature .................89 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ............................. 11
Replacement Keys .................................... 11 Front Seat ............................. 85, 86, 88 Service Assistance ................................. 267
Replacement Tires .................................. 195 Inspection .......................................115 Service Contract .................................... 268
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 269 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................89 Service Manuals .................................... 270
Restraints, Child .................................... 102 Lap/Shoulder Belts .............................86 Settings.............................................. 215
Restraints, Head ...................................... 20 Operating Instructions..........................88 Personal ........................................ 215
Rotation, Tires ....................................... 200 Pregnant Women ................................89 Shift Lever Override ................................ 165
Pretensioners ....................................89 Shoulder Belts ........................................ 86
S Rear Seat .........................................86 Signals, Turn ...................................72, 117
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...................... 115 Reminder .................................... 67, 85 Siri ................................................... 264
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................... 117 Seat Belt Pretensioner .........................89 Sirius Satellite Radio ............................... 230
Safety Defects, Reporting .......................... 269 Untwisting Procedure ...........................89 Favorites ........................................ 232
Safety Information, Tire ............................ 186 Seat Belts Maintenance ............................204 Replay ........................................... 231
Safety Tips ........................................... 115 Seats ...................................................15 SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Safety, Exhaust Gas ................................ 115 Adjustment........................................15 Browse in SXM ................................ 232
Schedule, Maintenance ............................ 169 Fold And Tumble Rear ..........................18 Favorites ........................................ 232
Power ..............................................19 Replay ........................................... 231
Rear Folding ......................................15 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ......................... 200
Reclining ..........................................16 Snow Tires .......................................... 197
Seatback Release ...............................15 Spare Tires ...................................197, 198
Tilting...............................................15 Spark Plugs ......................................... 211
Speed Control
Cancel ........................................... 130
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .................... 128
277
Starting .............................................. 118 Tires .......................... 117, 192, 197, 201 Trailer Towing ....................................... 138
Automatic Transmission ..................... 118 Aging (Life Of Tires) ...........................195 Transmission
Button .............................................10 Air Pressure .....................................192 Automatic .......................122, 123, 184
Cold Weather................................... 118 Chains ...........................................200 Maintenance .................................. 184
Engine Fails To Start.......................... 119 Changing ................................152, 186 Transporting Pets .................................. 115
Steering Compact Spare ................................197 Tread Wear Indicators ............................. 195
Tilt Column........................................22 General Information ..................192, 197 Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) .................................. 45
Wheel, Heated ...................................22 High Speed .....................................193 Trunk Release, Emergency .......................... 45
Wheel, Tilt ......................................... 22 Inflation Pressure .............................193 Turn Signals ........................................... 72
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................... 259 Jacking ................................... 152, 186
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Life Of Tires .....................................195 U
Controls .............................................. 259 Load Capacity ..........................188, 189 Uconnect
Storage......................................... 52, 202 Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..69, 81 Advanced Phone Connectivity ............. 254
Storage, Vehicle .......................................38 Quality Grading ................................201 Phone Call Features ......................... 251
Store Radio Presets ................................ 229 Radial ............................................193 Things You Should Know About Your
Stuck, Freeing ....................................... 165 Replacement ...................................195 Uconnect Phone ........................... 254
Sun Roof ............................................... 41 Rotation .........................................200 Uconnect Settings ............................ 215
Sun Visor Extension...................................25 Safety ....................................186, 192 Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone)
Synthetic Engine Oil ................................ 176 Snow Tires ......................................197 Making A Phone Call ......................... 251
Spare Tires .............................. 197, 198 Uconnect Phone .....................247, 248, 249
T Spinning .........................................194 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call
Telescoping Steering Column ........................22 Tread Wear Indicators ........................195 — Call Currently In Progress............. 252
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC)..............37 Wheel Nut Torque .............................206 Call Continuation ............................. 254
Tilt Steering Column ..................................22 To Open Hood .........................................43 Call Termination .............................. 253
Tire And Loading Information Placard ............ 188 Towing ................................................138 Cancel Command............................. 247
Tire Markings ........................................ 186 Disabled Vehicle ...............................167 Connect Or Disconnect Link
Tire Safety Information ............................. 186 Recreational ....................................139 Between The Uconnect Phone
Towing Behind A Motorhome ......................139 And Mobile Phone......................... 254 11
Traction ..............................................140
Traction Control .......................................80
278
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Uconnect Settings W

Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing .. 249 Customer Programmable Features........215 Warning Lights
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device ......... 250 Uconnect Voice Command .........................261 (Instrument Cluster Descriptions) .................. 68
Dial By Saying A Number .................... 251 Uniform Tire Quality Grades ........................201 Warnings And Cautions ................................ 7
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ........48 Warranty Information .............................. 269
Device ........................................ 249 Universal Transmitter .................................48 Washer
Help Command ................................ 247 Unleaded Gasoline ..................................207 Adding Fluid.................................... 174
Making A Call................................... 251 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .....................89 Washers, Windshield................................. 28
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A USB ...................................................259 Washing Vehicle .................................... 203
Favorite ...................................... 250 Water
Managing Your Favorites .................... 250 V Driving Through ............................... 140
Operation ....................................... 246 Vanity Mirrors ..........................................24 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ....................... 199
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ...............206 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................ 199
Phone ........................................ 247 Vehicle Loading .............................137, 189 Wind Buffeting ...................................41, 43
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .....................7 Window Fogging ...................................... 38
Device ........................................ 249 Vehicle Security Alarm ................................12 Windows............................................... 40
Pair Additional Mobile Phones ............. 248 Vehicle Storage ................................38, 202 Windshield Defroster............................... 116
Phonebook Download ........................ 250 Voice Command .....................................254 Windshield Washers ................................. 28
Receiving A Call................................ 252 Voice Recognition System (VR) ....................261 Windshield Wiper Blades .......................... 178
Recent Calls .................................... 252 Windshield Wipers ................................... 28
To Remove A Favorite ........................ 251 Wipers Blade Replacement ....................... 178
Touch-Tone Number Entry .................. 252
Transfer Call To And From Mobile
Phone ........................................ 254
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is
changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
to install them on products previously manufactured. find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new FIAT® brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling common questions.
1-888-242-6342 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
FIAT® brand dealer.
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase
replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL: Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive.
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not WARNING
idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear
gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your
go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what
2 0 2 0 F IAT ® 500L
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of
your FIAT® brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google
Play® Store and enter the search keyword “FIAT” (U.S. residents only).
U. S. Canada
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST

UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND
WARRANTY BOOKLETS
mopar.com owners.mopar.ca
20_BG_OM_EN_USC
2 0 2 0 F I AT ® 5 0 0 L OW N E R ’ S M AN UAL
First Edition
fiatusa.com (U.S.) or fiatcanada.com/en (Canada)
©2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group
Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark
of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.

Fiat 500l

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fiat 500l

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fiat 500l

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing

DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST

2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................ 8 2

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................55 3

5 STARTING AND OPERATING ............................................................................................ 118 5

6 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .................................................................................................. 142 6

7 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ................................................................................... 169 7

8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................206 8

9 MULTIMEDIA ............................................................................................................................ 214 9

10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ................................................................................................. 267 10

INTRODUCTION SEATS........................................................................15 INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................... 27

INTERIORS ............................................................204 UCONNECT SETTINGS .......................................... 215 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Symbols VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 9

10 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

IGNITION SWITCH WARNING! (Continued)

NOTE:  Do not leave the key fob in or near the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 11

Key-In-Ignition Reminder General Information

12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13

14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15

Child-Protection Door Lock System

16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Forward/Rearward Adjustment Seat Height Adjustment

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17

18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Fold And Tumble Rear Seat 2. Fold the seatback forward.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19

Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Heated Seats — If Equipped NOTE:

20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21

22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23

24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Conversation Mirror — If Equipped Power Mirrors Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

Power Mirror Controls

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If EXTERIOR LIGHTS

26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

High Beams Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay Courtesy Lights/Approaching Lights

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29

Front Windshield Washer Operation

30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31

CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Climate Control Overview

The Climate Control system allows you to regu-

Manual Climate Controls

32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Manual Climate Control Descriptions

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33

Mix Mode Mix Mode

Front Defrost Mode Front Defrost Mode

34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Climate Control Overview

Automatic Climate Controls